- Manuals
- Brands
- Seat
- Hatchback
- Altea Freetrack
- Owner's Manual
Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
In gl
s 5P
00 12
00 3B
Q (
07 .0
7) (
G T9
)
auto emocin A lt
ea
In g
l s
(0 7
.0 7
)
auto emocin
A LT E A
ow ne
r s
m an
ua l
5P 00
12 00
3B Q
Portada Manual ALTEA 6/9/07 15:58 Pgina 3
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.
No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.
Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.09.07
Interior Manual ALTEA 6/9/07 16:00 Pgina 1
fully to familiarise yourself with
l contribute to preserve its value.
s and parts exchange.
as this should be kept with the
altea ingles.book Seite 1 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Foreword This owner's manual and the corresponding supplements should be read care
your vehicle.
Also, the regular care and maintenance and correct handling of the vehicle wil
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner
vehicle.
altea ingles.book Seite 2 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Contents 3
shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
eating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox .
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
coustic parking aid system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
s and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
riving economically and with respect for the
nvironment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
143
146
147
150
150
152
155
159
160
160
161
162
163
166
167
172
173
175
179
179
179
180
181
186
186
186
187
191
altea ingles.book Seite 3 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Contents
The structure of this manual . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the instrument panel . . . . . . .
Instrument panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel lighting controls . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
s
F
L
Hea
H
C
2
G
Driv
A
S
Ig
S
M
A
H
A
C
Tip
Inte
B
A
(
E
Driv
R
E
D
D
e
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
17
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
51
55
55
55
56
59
65
72
84
84
84
88
92
93
93
99
100
102
104
106
108
111
111
117
120
121
125
128
128
129
131
132
134
Contents4
altea ingles.book Seite 4 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, parts replacement and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility System) . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
What you should be aware of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How are the figures measured? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (86 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp) . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 100 kW (136 bhp) . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 100 kW (136 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp) . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp).
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
194
195
195
196
198
198
199
205
207
207
207
208
208
209
209
210
211
212
215
219
221
225
226
229
229
237
237
239
245
247
254
263
266
271
271
271
273
274
274
276
276
277
278
279
280
282
283
284
285
287
288
289
290
292
293
294
296
297
The structure of this manual 5
The structure of this manual Before reading this manual it must be understood This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of going to press. Some of the equipment described here
will not be available until a later date, or is available only in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Even if the copyright symbol
does not appear this does not mean that the mark is not copyrighted.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution Texts with this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of damage to
your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts with this symbol refer to points relevant to the protection of the environ-
ment.
Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
altea ingles.book Seite 5 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Content6
Content This manual is structured to give you the information you need as quickly and
clearly as possible. The contents of this Manual are grouped into relatively
short sections making up chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire
manual is divided into five large parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of the
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, how to create a suitable
climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Tips and Maintenance Advice relating to driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and certain
problems which you may solve yourself.
4. Technical data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
altea ingles.book Seite 6 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Data
s a part of the occupant protection
the risk of injury during an accident.
fety and the safety of your passengers. In the
ty equipment could reduce the risk of injury. The
f the safety equipment in your SEAT:
e front and rear side seats,
e front seats,
r the front seats,
eat backrests.
straints*,
r child seats in the rear side seats with the
straints,
e position and non-use position,
n.
ned above works together to provide you and
t possible protection in accident situations. But
t help you or your passengers if you or your
altea ingles.book Seite 7 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and follow in the interest of your own
safety and the safety of your passengers.
WARNING
This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the vehicle wallet also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment i
system and can reduce
Never gamble with your sa
event of an accident, the safe
following list includes most o
three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiters for th
belt tension devices for th
belt height adjustment fo
front airbags,
side airbags in the front s
curtain airbags,
crash-active front head re
ISOFIX anchor points fo
ISOFIX system,
height-adjustable head re
head restraints with in-us
adjustable steering colum
The safety equipment mentio
your passengers with the bes
this safety equipment canno
Safe driving8
gers in the rear seats always have the
-use position page 14.
adjust the head restraints according to
propriate child seats and properly
age 46.
ing position. Instruct your passengers
r sitting position page 10.
ecurely. Instruct your passengers also to
roperly page 19.
fety?
determined by your driving style and
of all occupants.
ible for yourself and your passengers.
r driving safety is affected, you endanger
n the road , for this reason:
be distracted from the traffic around you,
elephone conversations.
riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
d speed limits.
altea ingles.book Seite 8 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
passengers assume an incorrect sitting position or do not properly adjust or
use this equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to observe when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should observe in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Securely restrain all parcels page 17.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly for your
size.
Ensure that the passen
head restraints in the in
Instruct passengers to
their height.
Protect children with ap
applied seat belts p
Assume the correct sitt
also to assume a prope
Fasten your safety belt s
fasten their seat belts p
What affects driving sa
Driving safety is largely
the personal behaviour
As driver, you are respons
When your concentration o
yourself as well as others o
Do not allow yourself to
e.g. by passengers or t
Never drive when your d
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws an
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 9 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are under pres-
sure of time.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Safe driving10
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the driver:
el so that there is a distance of at least
ering wheel and the centre of your chest
rwards or backwards so that you are able
, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
angled .
ch the highest point of the steering
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head fig. 2.
upright position so that your back rests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
altea ingles.book Seite 10 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for safe
and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
Adjust the steering whe
25 cm between the ste
fig. 1.
Move the driver's seat fo
to press the accelerator
your knees still slightly
Ensure that you can rea
wheel.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Data
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
airbag can provide the greatest
he event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the front
ger seat back as far as possible .
n upright position so that your back rests
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head page 13.
ot well in front of the front passenger seat.
orrectly page 19.
e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
ow to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
tion of the front passenger can lead to severe
altea ingles.book Seite 11 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fasten your seat belt correctly page 19.
Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat page 128.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the hub of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the
possible protection in t
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
passenger:
Move the front passen
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt c
It is possible to deactivate th
stances page 25.
For detailed information on h
page 131.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posi injuries.
Safe driving12
ot well in front of the rear seat.
rrectly page 19.
d restraint system when you take children
6.
rear seat are not sitting properly, they could
properly to achieve maximum protection.
e optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.
altea ingles.book Seite 12 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the foot well when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in the event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger during sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
observe the following:
Adjust the headrest to the correct position page 14.
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your seat belt co
Use an appropriate chil
in the vehicle page 4
WARNING
If the passengers on the sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint
Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Data
properly to achieve maximum protection.
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at the very least, at eye level
page 128.
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could result in death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the occu-
d into their seats during a rear end collision. The
e backrest activates the crash-active head
hich moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
duces the distance between the occupant's
reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
altea ingles.book Seite 13 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 3 and fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus pant's size.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are presse
resulting body pressure on th
restraint* on the front seat, w
same time. This movement re
head and the head rest, thus
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
ear seat head restraints
restraints are an important part of the
can reduce the risk of injuries in
s
Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label
altea ingles.book Seite 14 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the occu- pant's size.
Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of r
Properly adjusted head
occupant protection and
most accident situation
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Data
itting positions
ition can lead to severe injuries to
timal protection only when the belt webs
ncorrect sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t web position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
o assume an incorrect sitting position in
lling .
amples of sitting positions that could be
The list is not complete, but we would like to
.
icle is in motion:
,
r to the rear,
sh panel,
h,
e of a seat,
w,
a window,
dash panel,
surface of a seat,
altea ingles.book Seite 15 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Rear outer seat head restraints
The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the
head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along
with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use.
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.
Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 129.
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting pos
occupants.
Seat belts can provide op
are properly positioned. I
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect bel
responsible for all vehicle
Never permit anyone t
the vehicle while trave
The following list contains ex
dangerous for all occupants.
make you aware of this issue
Therefore, whenever the veh
Never stand in the vehicle
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest fa
never lean against the da
never lie on the rear benc
never sit on the front edg
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a windo
never put your feet out of
never put your feet on the
never put your feet on the
Safe driving16
e pedal must be free to move further than
hicle to a stop.
ort your feet properly and give you a good feel
on can lead to critical situations while driving.
driver foot well. An object could move into the operation. In the event of a sudden driving or not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!
r side
used which can be securely fastened
ot impair operation of the pedals.
ats are securely fastened during the trip
pedals .
ve the pedals clear and which are secured to
ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
ed, you could cause an accident. Risk of
s are always securely attached.
altea ingles.book Seite 16 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
never travel in a foot well ,
never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags deploy, striking an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must
never be impaired by objects or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened in the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brak
normal in order to bring the ve
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which supp
for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operati
Never place objects in the pedal area and impair pedal braking manoeuvre, you will accelerator pedal. Risk of acc
Floor mats on the drive
Only floor mats may be
in the foot well and do n
Ensure that the floor m
and do not obstruct the
Only use floor mats which lea
prevent them from slipping. Y
fied dealership.
WARNING
If the pedals are obstruct serious injuries.
Ensure that the floor mat
Safe driving 17
Safety Fir Technical Data
he luggage compartment and secure them on
traps to secure heavy objects.
res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.
d axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and
unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal
lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the
ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.
altea ingles.book Seite 17 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 18.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment can cause serious injuries.
Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.
Use suitable specialist s
During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide
Never exceed the allowe allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.
Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.
Never transport passeng passenger must be properly
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Safe driving18
her objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could result in the or accidents.
age or other objects from flying forward, ning cords which are secured to the fastening
on the fastening rings.
altea ingles.book Seite 18 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings
There are four fastening rings in the luggage compartment
which can be used to secure luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the
luggage compartment on page 17.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or ot with inappropriate or damag event of braking manoeuvres
To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retai rings.
Never secure a child seat
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Data
er places, two individual front seats and three
seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
ople than there are seats available in the
hicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .
*
as a reminder to the driver to fasten
e:
securely.
rs to fasten their seat belts properly before
ng child seats of the correct height for the
altea ingles.book Seite 19 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Seat belts
Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Properly worn seat belts can save lives!
In this chapter you will learn why seat belts are so important, how
they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and observe all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. Therefore, you and your passen- gers should always wear the seat belts properly as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Pregnant women or persons with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other occupants, these persons can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five passeng
places on the rear seat. Each
WARNING
Never transport more pe vehicle.
Every occupant in the ve belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicl
Fasten your safety belt
Instruct your passenge
driving off.
Protect children by usi
age of the child.
Seat belts20
altea ingles.book Seite 20 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
The warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up1) if the driver seat belt
is not fastened when the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic
signal is given for a few seconds and a text is displayed on the combi-instru-
ment asking you to fasten your seat belt1).
The warning lamp* does not go out until the driver seat belt is fastened
while the ignition is switched on.
1) Depending on the model version
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Data
aws of physics work in the case of a head-on
rts moving fig. 7 there is a certain amount of
rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
sengers. The higher the speed and the greater
there is to be released in an accident.
owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
km/h, for example, the kinetic energy increases
ur example are not restrained by seat belts, the
gy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
nne (1,000 kg). At greater speed these forces
belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
inue to move forward at the speed their vehicle
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts
altea ingles.book Seite 21 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Why wear seat belts?
Frontal collisions and the laws of physics
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy is generated.
It is easy to explain how the l
collision: When a vehicle sta
energy known as kinetic ene
The amount of kinetic energ
weight of the vehicle and pas
the weight, the more energy
The most significant factor, h
doubles from 25 km/h to 50
by a factor of four.
Because the passengers in o
entire amount of kinetic ener
fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one to
are even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat
frontal collision they will cont
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seatbelts
Seat belts22
acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
stitute for the seat belts. When deployed,
al protection. All occupants (including the
elts properly during the trip. This will reduce
e event of an accident regardless of whether
.
ered only once. To achieve the best possible
always be worn properly so that you will be
h no airbag is deployed.
passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
anger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
altea ingles.book Seite 22 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal
accidents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
Many people believe that the occupants can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision, this is false.
Even at low speeds the forces
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dashboard
fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a sub
airbags provide only addition
driver) must be wearing seat b
the risk of severe injuries in th
an airbag is fitted for the seat
Note that airbags can be trigg
protection, the seat belt must
protected in accidents in whic
It is also important for the rear
could otherwise be thrown for
who do not use seat belts end
occupants fig. 10.
Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Data
n seat belts before every trip, even when "just
wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
at belts to be an effective means of substantially
d improving the chances of survival in a serious
rly worn seat belts improve the protection
ent of an accident. For this reason, wearing a
most countries.
ipped with airbags, the seat belts must be
airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
irbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
e control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
eir seat belts properly before you drive off!
seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this booklet.
lts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
altea ingles.book Seite 23 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Seat belts protect
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front crumple zones and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy generated in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the forces acting on the occupants and consequently the risk
of injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
reduce substantially the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers
have shown properly worn se
reducing the risk of injury an
accident. Furthermore, prope
provided by airbags in the ev
seat belt is required by law in
Although your vehicle is equ
fastened and worn. The front
frontal accidents. The front a
collisions, minor side collisio
airbag trigger threshold in th
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened th
Safety notes on using
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat be
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 11 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking
Seat belts24
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the belt web is not
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
altea ingles.book Seite 24 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. That applies also to your front and rear passengers danger of injury!
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept cl properly page 206.
Safety belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Data
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
altea ingles.book Seite 25 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 24, fig. 12.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices page 28.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts26
also fasten their seat belts properly
he unborn child is for the mother to
rly at all times during the pregnancy.
imum protection only when the belt web
age 25.
d head restraint correctly page 10.
pull the belt evenly across your chest and
the pelvis fig. 15.
to the buckle for the corresponding seat
it is securely locked with an audible click
hat the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
altea ingles.book Seite 26 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Pregnant women must
The best protection for t
wear the seat belt prope
The seat belt provides max
is properly positioned p
Adjust the front seat an
Holding the latch plate,
as low as possible over
Insert the latch plate in
and push it down until
.
Pull the belt to ensure t
the buckle.
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Data
hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.
height
ers can be used to adjust the position
houlder.
the front seats can be used to adjust the
shoulder.
Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster
altea ingles.book Seite 27 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belt height adjust
of the seat belt at the s
The seat belt adjuster for
proper belt position at the
Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts28
es
sion device
, the seat belts on the front seats are
upants are equipped with belt tension devices.
nsion devices during severe head-on, lateral
seat belt is being worn. This retracts and
ing the forward motion of the occupants.
triggered only once.
ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns, or in situations where no large
rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
at there was a fire in the vehicle.
ments must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
pleased to pass on the information to you.
belt tension devices
omponents of the seat belts that are installed
you work on the belt tension devices or remove
when performing other repair work, the seat
nsequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
function incorrectly or not at all.
altea ingles.book Seite 28 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position page 27, fig. 17.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt page 25.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23.
Belt tension devic
Function of the belt ten
During a frontal collision
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occ
Sensors will trigger the belt te
and rear collisions only if the
tightens the seat belts, reduc
The belt tension device can be
The belt tension devices will n
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side or
Note If the belt tension devices
normal and is no indication th
The relevant safety require
components of the system are
these regulations and will be
Service and disposal of
The belt tension devices are c
in the seats of your vehicle. If
and install parts of the system
belt may be damaged. The co
dent, the belt tension devices
Seat belts 29
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 29 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system30
g may inflict critical or fatal injuries upon the
larly to children.
possible distance between yourself and the
t airbags can completely deploy when trig-
m protection.
at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
d the speed of the vehicle.
ered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ollision and detected by the control unit. If the
during the collision and measured by the
specified reference values, the front, side
be triggered. Take into account that the visible
an accident, for whatever reason, are not an
gs were triggered.
orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.
hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is
, size or weight.
eat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or osition, the risk of injury is increased risk of injury will be further increased if you ag.
y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .
altea ingles.book Seite 30 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before you drive:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly
page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint seat correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 46.
The airbag deploys in fractions of a second and with a high velocity. If you
have assumed an incorrect seating position at that moment, you could
sustain critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all occupants maintain
a correct sitting position while travelling.
Braking heavily the moment before an accident may cause an occupant not
wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag.
In this case, the inflating airba
occupant. This applies particu
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fron
gered, providing their maximu
The most important factors th
dent, the angle of collision an
Whether the airbags are trigg
ation rate resulting from the c
vehicle deceleration occurring
control unit remains below the
and/or curtain airbag will not
damage in a vehicle following
indication as to why the airba
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat
All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age
If you are not wearing a s assume an incorrect sitting p substantially. This increased are struck by an inflating airb
To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Data
ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
tances, it should be necessary to transport a at on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely he following safety measures:
enger airbag page 44, Deactivating
e approved by the child seat manufacturer for r seat with front or side airbag.
instructions of the child seat manufacturer the warnings page 46, Child safety.
ling the child seat, push the front passenger ar so that the greatest possible distance to the s ensured.
s prevent the front passenger seat from being .
ont passenger seat must be in an upright
g and belt tension device system
itors the airbag and belt tension
ll airbags and belt tension devices in the
its and wiring connections.
altea ingles.book Seite 31 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if you
transport the child in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport all
children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we urgently recommend that you transport children on the rear
seats. That is the safest place in the vehicle for children. Alternatively, the
front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch
page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the
age and size of each child page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a
If, under special circums child in a rear-facing child se essential that you observe t
Disable the front pass airbags*.
The child seat must b use on a front passenge
Follow the installation and absolutely observe
Before properly instal seat all the way to the re front passenger airbag i
Ensure that no object pushed completely back
The backrest of the fr position.
Warning lamp for airba
This warning lamp mon
device system.
The warning lamp monitors a
vehicle, including control un
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system32
al of the airbags
are installed in various places in your vehicle.
em or remove and install parts of the system
work, parts of the airbag system may be
ay be that, in the event of an accident, the
oes not inflate at all.
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
miliar with these requirements.
ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.
hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, y them in any way.
ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.
el or dash panel, you may use only a dry cloth Never clean the dash panel and surface of the s containing solvents. Solvents cause the the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic njuries.
djust, remove or install parts of the airbag
stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the
ation and qualified personnel.
altea ingles.book Seite 32 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
The functionality of the airbag and belt tension device system is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not come on when the ignition is switched on,
does not go out about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
goes out and then comes on again after the ignition is switched on,
or if it comes on or flickers while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that, in the event of an acci- dent, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.
Repair, care and dispos
The parts of the airbag system
If you work on the airbag syst
when performing other repair
damaged. The consequence m
airbag inflates incorrectly or d
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
Vehicle disposal centres are fa
WARNING
If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate
Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif
It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf
To clean the steering whe or one moistened with water. airbag module with cleanser surface to become porous. If parts can cause substantial i
Never attempt to repair, a system.
Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 33 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
We urgently recommend that you go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system34
is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and
ger is located in the dash panel fig. 19.
ext AIRBAG.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
on for the head and chest in the event of a
e 37, Safety notes on front airbag system.
ction of restraining the occupants, the seat
ront passenger in a position where the airbags
ion in a frontal collision.
stitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
afety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
djusted the head restraints properly. For this
wear the seat belts at all times - not only
w in most countries, but also for your safety
bag system are:
onitoring system (control unit),
ag with gas generator) for the driver and front
ash panel insert page 31.
system is monitored electronically. The airbag
a few seconds every time the ignition is
if the warning lamp
e ignition is switched on page 31,
econds after the ignition is switched on,
on again after the ignition is switched on,
while the car is moving.
altea ingles.book Seite 34 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver
the airbag for the front passen
Airbags are identified by the t
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protecti
severe frontal collision pag
In addition to their normal fun
belts also hold the driver and f
can provide maximum protect
The airbag system is not a sub
the vehicle's overall passive s
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have a
reason, it is most important to
because this is required by la
page 19, Introduction.
The main parts of the front air
an electronic control and m
the two front airbags (airb
passenger,
a warning lamp in the d
The functionality of the airbag
warning lamp will light up for
switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system
does not come on when th
does not go out about 4 s
goes out and then comes
or if it comes on or flickers
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Data
s
the risk of head or chest injury.
d so that the airbags for the driver and front
severe frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed
movement of the front occupants and help to
e head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag. Once the impact has been
s sufficiently for the front occupants to see
Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags
altea ingles.book Seite 35 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor frontal collision,
during a side collision,
during a rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a frontal collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of front airbag
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designe
passenger are triggered in a
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward
reduce the risk of injury to th
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
absorbed, the airbag deflate
forward.
Airbag system36
deploys. This is normal and is no indication
icle.
. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the airbags are trig- ed
altea ingles.book Seite 36 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag
that there was a fire in the veh
The function of the airbag covers if the airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver
and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers remain
connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig ger
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Data
ags
t a substitute for the seat belts.
ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat
side airbags are located in the rear wheel
are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
n the rear wheel housing lining.
elts, the side airbag system gives the front seat
ion for the upper body in the event of a severe
afety notes on the operation of the side airbag
bags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the body facing the impact. In addition to their
the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat
altea ingles.book Seite 37 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Safety notes on front airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt or if you lean forward or to the side or assume an incorrect sitting position, the risk of injury is increased substantially. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.
Occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airb
The airbag system is no
The front side airbags are loc
backrests fig. 22. The rear
housing lining. The locations
region of the backrests and i
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protect
side collision page 40, S
system.
In a side collision the side air
the front seats to the areas of
normal function of protecting
Airbag system38
door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.
the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been
enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.
e doors should be made in a qualified author-
s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for
he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise there is a danger that stem may fail to trigger, or not trigger
altea ingles.book Seite 38 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. For this reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all
times - not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for
your safety page 19, Introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered
if the ignition is switched off,
during a minor side collision,
during a frontal collision,
during a rear-end collision,
or if the vehicle rolls.
The main parts of the airbag system are
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side
airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.
a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31.
The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically. The airbag
warning lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is
switched on (self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct
Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.
Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted
Any work carried out to th ised workshop.
The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.
If a fault should occur in t immediately by a qualified w during a side collision, the sy correctly.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Data
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
altea ingles.book Seite 39 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and is no indication
that there was a fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system40
incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.
ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may tion of the airbag system.
components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged in any way,
orking of the system. All work carried out on in a qualified workshop.
altea ingles.book Seite 40 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at greater risk of injury should the side airbag system be triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 207, Accessories, parts replacement and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
When children assume an selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio
Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by be introduced into the opera
Do not attempt to modify
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea this may affect the correct w the front door must be made
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Data
w in most countries, but also for your safety
airbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit),
gs with gas generator) for the driver, front
n the rear seats,
dash panel insert page 31.
g system is monitored electronically.
ll not be triggered
off,
g. 24 Location of left curtain airbag
altea ingles.book Seite 41 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but is an integral part of
the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. For this
reason, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times - not only
because this is required by la
page 19, Introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and
the curtain airbags (airba
passenger and passengers o
a warning lamp in the
The functionality of the airba
The curtain airbag system wi
if the ignition is switched
Fi
Airbag system42
e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
rs the side windows and door pillars.
extra protection in an accident, the airbags
dly (within fractions of a second). A fine dust
deploys. This is normal and is no indication
icle.
hion the movement of the front occupants and
ry to the upper body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
ration of the curtain airbag system
tly, they can considerably reduce the
ds of accident.
gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts
ad air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
altea ingles.book Seite 42 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
during a frontal collision,
during a rear-end collision,
if the vehicle rolls,
during a minorside collision,
WARNING
If a fault should occur in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions th
of the vehicle fig. 25.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered,
process, the curtain bag cove
In order to provide the desired
have to deploy extremely rapi
may develop when the airbag
that there was a fire in the veh
The fully deployed airbags cus
help to reduce the risk of inju
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the ope
If you use airbags correc
risk of injury in many kin
WARNING
In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the he vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 43 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 207, Accessories, parts replacement and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. When using the coat hooks, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for one accident only, if they have been deployed they must be replaced.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, a fault may be introduced into the operation of the airbag system.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged in any way, this may affect the correct working of the system. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system44
g is deactivated, this means that only the
d. All the other airbags in the vehicle
airbag
in the key operated switch in the glove
fig. 26.
lamp OFF in the instrument panel
en the ignition is switched on .
irbag
in the key-operated switch in the glove
fig. 26.
Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
altea ingles.book Seite 44 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airba
frontal airbag is deactivate
remain functional.
Disabling front passenger
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switch
box to the position OFF
Check that the warning
fig. 27 remains lit wh
Enabling front passenger a
Switch off ignition.
Turn the ignition switch
box to the position ON
Fig. 26 In the glove compartment: key for enabling and disabling front passenger airbag
Airbag system 45
Safety Fir Technical Data
er the front passenger airbag will deploy m your passengers of this.
key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.
altea ingles.book Seite 45 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Check that the warning lamp in the instrument panel does
page 44, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on
.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in exceptional cases. page 46, Child safety.
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is not certain wheth during an accident! Infor
When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag
WARNING (continued)
Child safety46
de the manufacturer's directions for child seat
lways keep them in the vehicle.
altea ingles.book Seite 46 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age be transported on the rear
seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint system or
the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and weight. For
safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in the centre of
the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical principles involved and the forces acting in a collision apply to
children just as much as adults page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But
unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program including systems for all ages made by Peke2).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
page 47, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend that you inclu
use in the vehicle wallet and a
2) Not for all countries
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Data
bies on your lap, this can result in potentially
transported in a vehicle without being properly neel on a seat while travelling. In an accident, ugh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries upants.
proper sitting position when the car is moving, greater risk of injury during a sudden braking . This is particularly the case if the child is trav- r seat and the airbag system is triggered in an nsequences including serious injury or death.
protect your child!
pervised in a child seat or alone in the vehicle.
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.
an 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat t system, as this could cause injuries to the uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
bbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
lts can cause injuries even in a minor collision res.
aximum protection only when the belt web is 24, Safety belts.
py a child seat page 48, Child seats.
altea ingles.book Seite 47 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
page 48.
Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be secured, or to stand up or k the child could be flung thro to themselves and other occ
If children assume an im they expose themselves to manoeuvre or in an accident elling on the front passenge accident; this could have co
A suitable child seat can
Never leave a child unsu
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can
Children who are less th belt without a child restrain abdominal and neck areas d accident.
Do not allow the belt we on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat be or sudden braking manoeuv
The seat belt provides m properly positioned page
Only one child may occu
WARNING (continued)
Child safety48
ats
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
d.
t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 28.
ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
de the manufacturer's directions for child seat
lways keep them in the vehicle.
ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 47.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
altea ingles.book Seite 48 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R means: Economic
Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child se
A suitable child seat and
help to protect your chil
Group 0: For babies from abou
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from abo
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend that you inclu
use in the vehicle wallet and a
WARNING
Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety
Child safety 49
Safety Fir Technical Data
ats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
ld.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
sing child seats.
ude the manufacturer's directions for child seat
always keep them in the vehicle.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ats in conjunction with properly adjusted seat
eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints in
rn seat belts fig. 30.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
altea ingles.book Seite 49 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX and Toptether system (or even the anti-rota-
tion system) or seats in which the child faces the rear of the car are most
appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend that you include the manufacturer's directions for child seat
use in the vehicle wallet and always keep them in the vehicle.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child se
A suitable child seat an
help to protect your chi
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and u
We recommend that you incl
use in the vehicle wallet and
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child se
belts.
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age w
metres tall are best protected
conjunction with properly wo
Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety50
altea ingles.book Seite 50 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the torso. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Safety belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Child safety 51
Safety Fir Technical Data
+ y 1 with the ISOFIX and Toptether systems
ning the seatbelt by ISOFIX and Toptether
g systems page 52.
uries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in ort a child in the front passenger seat, the front ys be disabled page 44, Deactivating t to its highest position, in case it has this
information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 47.
cations
outer Rear centre
L U
L U
L U
U
altea ingles.book Seite 51 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Child seats in groups 0, 0 can be secured without faste
securing rings or anti-rotatin
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt.
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX and Toptether
anchors or antirotation mechanism/bracket
WARNING
When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size.
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This
represents a risk of fatal inj exceptional cases, to transp passenger airbag must alwa airbags* and move the sea adjustment.
Read and always observe of child seats in Safe
Weight class Weight Seat lo
Front passenger Rear
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U
WARNING (continued)
Child safety52
re fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rame and in others they are secured to the rear
is between the rear back rest and the seat.
in the space behind the rear seats. They are
e seat backs.
Toptether mountings are available from the
signed only for use with ISOFIX and
that do not have the ISOFIX or Toptether jects to the fastening rings this can result in e child!
t is secured correctly using the ISOFIX and
altea ingles.book Seite 52 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Securing the child seat by ISOFIX and Toptether systems or anti-rotating system.
The child seat with ISOFIX system can be secured quickly,
easily and safely on the rear outer seats using the system
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely. If the child seat is
equipped with Toptether anchor points, secure it to the corre-
spondent ring. If the child seat is fitted with any other antirota-
tion system, follow the manufacturer instructions carefully.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings a
rings are secured to the seat f
floor. Access to ISOFIX rings
Toptether rings are located
often located on the rear of th
Child seats with ISOFIX and
Authorised Service Centres.
WARNING
The retaining rings are de Toptether child seats.
Never secure child seats system, retaining belts or ob potentially fatal injuries to th
Ensure that the child sea Toptether anchors.
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings
53
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 53 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
54
Fig. 3
altea ingles.book Seite 54 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
2 Instrument panel
Cockpit 55
Safety Fir e Technical Data
d ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ner* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for right seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
for deactivated front passenger airbag . . . . . . .
er airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mpartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
asing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ning and closing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .
of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
rs or are optional extras.
150
152
155
132
44
30
134
167
139
162
212
106
106
106
altea ingles.book Seite 55 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenanc
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Instrument panel:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thumb wheel for left seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
Heating* an
Air conditio
Air conditio
Radio
Thumb wheel
Indicator light
Front passeng
Glove compart
Gear shift leve
Cup holder co
Handbrake
Pedals
Ignition lock .
Handle for rele
Button for ope
Safety switch*
Control* for op
Note Some of the items
models/model yea
A1
A2 111
A3
A4 114
A5 114
A6 116, 175
A7
56
59
72
A8
30
A9
121, 61
A10 132
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
Cockpit56
. 33 Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel
altea ingles.book Seite 56 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of dash panel instrument panel
Fuel gauge page 57
Multi-function display
Engine coolant temperature gauge page 57
Rev counter page 58
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 58
Speedometer
Fig
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Data
ature display
ngine coolant temperature.
d heavy engine loads fig. 35.
the needle should be in the middle section of
ay also rise when the engine is working hard,
peratures. This is no cause for concern as long
t light up and no warning* text appears in the
2, fig. 47 will light up if the needle is in the
arning appears in the instrument panel
Fig. 35 Instrument panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge
A2
altea ingles.book Seite 57 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Instrument panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears in the instrument panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL*.
Engine coolant temper
This gauge shows the e
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds an
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions,
the scale. The temperature m
especially at high outside tem
as the warning lamp does no
combi-instrument display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 7
warning zone. The following w
3) Depending on the model version
Fig. 34 Instrument panel: fuel gauge
AA
AB
AC
Cockpit58
vironment help you to save fuel and minimise engine
*
ed in the instrument panel display.
page 56, fig. 33 anti-clockwise to
r. If the knob is turned briefly anti-clock-
nce one hour further.
lockwise to the limit stop to set the
turned briefly clockwise the clock will
rther.
A5
altea ingles.book Seite 58 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
4)display . Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level
page 219 .
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always bear in mind the safety warnings page 212.
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone on the dial page 56, fig. 33 indicates the
maximum engine speed which may be used briefly when the engine is warm
and after it has been run in properly. However, it is advisable to change up a
gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before
the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the en Changing up a gear early will
noise.
Setting the digital clock
The digital clock is locat
Turn the setting knob the stop to set the hou
wise the clock will adva
Turn the setting knob c
minutes. If the knob is
advance one minute fu
4) Depending on the model version
A4
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Data
age 58.
ce interval display page 60.
isplay for the automatic gearbox*.
iptronic mode (automatic gearbox)*. The
the display field with a light background
Fig. 37 Detail of the instrument cluster: screen with Tiptronic gear indi- cator
altea ingles.book Seite 59 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Digital display in the instrument panel
Display (without warning or information texts)
The display in the instrument panel shows, amongst other
things, the mileage and trip recorder as well as the selector
lever position.
Digital clock display p
Distance display or servi
Selector lever position d
Display for the gears in T
selected gear appears in
fig. 37.Fig. 36 Detail of the instrument cluster: screen with different indicators
A1
A2
A3
A4
Cockpit60
le service interval display: Distance display or
isplay
splay for the automatic gearbox. The actual
ver or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)
ice Interval Display
isplay registers the total amount of distance
rs the short journeys. The last digit indicates
ecorder counter may be reset by the reset
.
ear in the mileage displays if a service is due
pears and the display km with the distance
xt service appointment is due. The display will
seconds. A clock symbol appears and the
ce appointment should be carried out. The
n the instrument panel display: SERV. IN ... KM age will disappear approximately 20 seconds
n or the engine is running. The normal display
he reset button on the trip counter or by
he MFI page 61, fig. 39 .
you can call up the current service message by
t knob for 2 seconds.
d by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
AB
altea ingles.book Seite 60 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Displayed categories
The display in the instrument panel shows the mileage and
trip recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Warning and monitoring indicators: Warning and indication lamps
Clock: Setting the time. In some vehicles the ambient temperature is
displayed to the right of the clock.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
- Optional indicators: e.g. Multi-function display (MFD) and ambient
temperature display
- Automatic indicators: Information texts and warnings: Warning and
information messages on the screen
- Menus providing further information and which can be used to make
diverse settings are also shown: Instrument panel menus
Distance display or flexib
flexible service interval d
Selector lever position di
position of the selector le
are highlighted.
Mileage display or Serv
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the d
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registe
steps of 100 metres. The trip r
button page 56, fig. 33
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will app
soon. A spanner symbol ap
that can be driven until the ne
change after approximately 10
number of days until the servi
following message is shown i
OR ... DAYS. The service mess
after the ignition is switched o
can be resumed by pressing t
pressing the rocker switch of t
With the ignition switched on,
pressing the trip counter rese
An overdue service is indicate
information.
Fig. 38 Digital display in the instrument panel
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A6
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Data
uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual ory. The selected memory will be shown
rner of the display.
hed on, briefly press the button fig. 39
wiper lever to move between the two
t you would like to reset.
on the windscreen wiper lever for at
e travel and consumption data from the moment
til it is switched off. If the journey is continued
off the ignition, the new values will be added to
ory. The memory will automatically be deleted
or more than two hours.
ollects the journey data for any number of indi-
nition is switched off for longer than two hours)
59 minutes travel time, 9999 kilometres
res of fuel consumed. The memory will automat-
named values is reached.
AA
altea ingles.book Seite 61 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Display with multi-function display (MFD)*
The multi-function display (MFD) shows you diverse journey
and consumption data.
The multi-function system
memory and 2 - Total mem in the upper right-hand co
Selecting memory
With the ignition switc
on the windscreen
memories.
Resetting the memory
Select the memory tha
Press and hold button
least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects th
the ignition is switched on un
within two hours of switching
the existing trip recorder mem
if the journey is interrupted f
The total journey memory 2 c
vidual journeys (even if the ig
up to a total of 99 hours and
distance travelled and 999 lit
ically be deleted if one of the
Fig. 39 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: button A and rocker switch B
Fig. 40 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator
AA
Cockpit62
tance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
both memories is 99 hours and 59 minutes.
y be deleted once this value has been reached.
peed, enter the speed indicator mode and
he display remembers the indicated speed. If
ed, a warning text is displayed on the screen5)
essing the button (Reset).
ng the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
memory value.
wn after a distance of approximately 100
shes will appear in the display until that time.
ery 5 seconds whilst the vehicle is in motion.
on, the message on the screen may vary and may be
speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
AB
altea ingles.book Seite 62 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Displays in the multi-function display (MFD)*
You can switch between the following displays in the multi-function display
(MFD) by operating the rocker switch fig. 41 on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Memory displays
Journey duration
Speed warning
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty (the dis
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value in
The memory will automaticall
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required s
press the button (Reset), t
the indicated speed is exceed
and a warning signal sounds.
This may be deactivated by pr
The speed may be altered usi
within 5 seconds of the initial
km/h - Average speed
The average speed will be sho
metres has been travelled. Da
The display will be updated ev
Fig. 41 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: button A and rocker switch B
Fig. 42 Digital instru- ment panel display: average fuel consumption indicator.
AB 5) Depending on the model versi
represented by flashing of the
AA
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Data
he road surface even if the snowflake symbol r this reason, not rely exclusively on this
y or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
y higher than the actual ambient temperature as
rom the engine.
text in the display
display with warning lamps and
ports.
ertain components and functions when the igni-
the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
gs and information texts in the display. An
ertain cases.
ls (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
ges given on a fault, you will receive information
or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
altea ingles.book Seite 63 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 9999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated using the figures for tank content and current fuel
consumption. It shows how far the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
tions as a reference.
litre/100km - Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption will be shown page 62, fig. 42 after a
distance of approximately 100 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
in the display until that time. The display will be updated every 5 seconds
whilst the vehicle is in motion. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
ltr/100km or ltr/hr - Current fuel consumption
The display will show the current fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
vehicle is in motion or in litre/hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
with the engine running.
Using this display you can see how your driving style affects fuel consump-
tion page 191.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin extends from -45C to +58C. At temperatures
lower than +4C, an ice crystal symbol is displayed and a warning sounds
if the vehicle is moving at more than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
flash for about 10 seconds and remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
above +4C or 6C if it was already lit.
WARNING
There could be black ice on t is not shown. You should, fo display - Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationar
ture displayed may be slightl
a result of the heat radiated f
Warning or information
Faults are shown in the
warning/information re
The system runs a check on c
tion is switched on and while
cated by symbols with warnin
audible warning is given in c
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbo
(priority 2).
Information text
In addition to warning messa
in the display on procedures
Cockpit64
ports are detected at the same time, the
er the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
t will disappear and the symbol will be shown
e display.
not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
g reports (yellow):6)
mation text PLEASE REFUEL.
ymbol with the information text REFILL Refill the windscreen washer tank
bol with the information text IMMOBILIS. ed, for this reason the vehicle may not start.
n
altea ingles.book Seite 64 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note In the case of screens without warning or information texts, faults are indi-
cated exclusively by the warning lamps.
Warning reports, Priority 1 (red)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp will flash or light up and will
be accompanied by three audible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
the car and switch off the engine. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
sional assistance if necessary.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols will be
displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
report.
Examples of priority 1 warning reports (red)
Brake system symbol with warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Coolant symbol with the warning text STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symbol with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MANUAL.
Warning reports, Priority 2 (yellow)
If one of these faults occurs, the warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
by one audible warning. The function should be checked as soon as possible.
If several priority 2 warning re
symbols are displayed one aft
a set time, the information tex
as a reminder at the side of th
Priority 2 warning reports will
reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warnin
Fuel symbol with the infor
Windscreen washer fluid s
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
page 221.
Electronic immobiliser sym
ACTIVE. A valid key was not us
6) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Data
ect the entry.
ple of menu use
Fig. 44 Digital instru- ment panel display: Main menu
altea ingles.book Seite 65 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Instrument panel menus
Main menu
The menu enables access to the different display functions.
Open main menu
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the eject button for at least 2 seconds. It may
be necessary to repeat this operation until the main menu is
displayed.
Select a menu from the main menu
To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of rocker switch . The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines.
Press button to sel
Example of menu use: Exam
Fig. 43 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu
AB
AB
AA
Cockpit66
y (MFD)
system. The navigation system must be
arrows and proximity bars are displayed. The
pass) and the name of the street along which
mounted by the manufacturer: Fixed tele-
tatus menu
tyres, units, language, independent heating,
t.
breakdown or service message appears. The
s after the ignition is switched on. The display
altea ingles.book Seite 66 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Main menu Function
Multi-function display Change to the multi-function display (MFD): Multi-function displa
Audio The current station will be shown when the radio is switched on.
Navigation This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a navigation
switched on. When the destination guide is activated, the turning
display is similar to that of the Navigation system.
If the destination guide is not activated, the direction of travel (com
you are driving are shown.
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a telephone
phone installation
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information texts: Vehicle s
This option flashes when one of these texts is displayed.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when using winter
the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience menu to be rese
Display off The display is switched off.
It comes on again on entering the main menu or when a warning,
main menu will be shown in the display for approximately 5 second
will then switch off again.
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Data
.
tion.
windscreen wiper lever. The Configura-
Winter tyres
res using the rocker switch.
enu Winter tyres is opened.
warning
o select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 tton to either increase or decrease the set
Fig. 46 Digital instru- ment panel display: winter tyres indicator
altea ingles.book Seite 67 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Example of menu use
All the menus on the instrument panel may be used according to the following procedure
The setting of a speed warning will be used as an example of how to
use the menus. This is a good idea if you are, for example, using
winter tyres which are not suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
1. Open the main menu
Switch on the ignition.
Hold down button for two seconds to return to main menu
from other menu. It may be necessary to repeat this operation
until the main menu is displayed.
2. Open the main menu Configuration
To choose an option from the menu, press the upper or lower end
of the rocker switch. The selected option is displayed between
two lines and there will also be a triangle on the right.
Select menu Configura
Press button on the
tion menu is opened.
3. Open the main menu
Select option Winter ty
Press button . The m
4. Program a speed limit
Use the rocker switch t
km/h and press the bu
speed.
Fig. 45 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu
AB
AA
AA
Cockpit68
ter tyres
k.
nds an optical and an acoustic signal when the
.
ed menu is shown.
altea ingles.book Seite 68 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
Use the rocker switch to select the menu point On/ Off and press
the button to switch the speed warning either on or off. If the
speed warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu Win
In the menu select Bac
The function Winter tyres se
vehicle reaches the set speed
Example menu Winter tyres
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
On the display Winter tyres
Function Name of menu displayed
X km/h The current set speed is displayed
or --- or dashes will be shown if the function is deactivated.
On / Off If the function is activated or deactivated
+10 km/h The set value increases by 10 km/h
-10 km/h The set value decreases by 10 km/h
Back The menu Winter tyres is closed and the last display
Cockpit 69
Safety Fir Technical Data
nd information texts: Information and warning
automatically disappear from the screen after a
Vehicle status menu.
texts may be viewed in this menu. If there are no
display. If there are several messages, each one
ple of menu use.
stem can be changed. Both 12- and 24-hour
mmer time (an S appears in the upper part of
al and acoustic warning will be given by the
e fitted winter tyres which are not suited for the
r's manual
seen in seven different languages
mperature, fuel consumption values and dis-
ience settings.
altea ingles.book Seite 69 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warning or information texts
Open Vehicle Condition menu
Select the option Vehicle status from the main menu: Main
menu and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Priority 2 warning messages a
messages on the screen will
time and will be stored in the
The warning and information
messages, ok appears on the
is shown for four seconds.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle functions.
Open Configuration menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use: Exam
Configuration Function
Time The hours and minutes of the clock and the navigation sy
formats are available and the time may be changed to su
the screen)
Winter tyres The menu allows the setting of a speed at which an optic
system. You can use this function, for example, if you hav
top speed of your vehicle. See chapter Wheels in owne
Settings: Language The display texts and the navigation system texts can be
Units This option allows you to select the units for displaying te
tances.
Convenience From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven
Cockpit70
venience from the main menu and press
indscreen wiper lever.
le of menu use
settings: Lights and visibility Menu.
altea ingles.book Seite 70 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle convenience settings.
Open menu Convenience
Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Choose the option Con the button on the w
Example of menu use: Examp
Lights & visibility From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
Display off Only emergency messages appear
Back This returns to the main menu
AA
AA
Convenience Function
Open doors Selective opening/ Complete opening
Self-locking
Self-unlocking
Audible warning function On / off (acoustic signal of centralised locking)
Convenience opening Off
All
1 door
Synchronized regulation of wing mirrors Synchronized/individual
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit 71
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts & visibility from the menu and press
screen wiper lever.
ple of menu use
ds, from a minimum of 10 seconds to a maxi-
k at least three times when turned on.
is menu are restored.
altea ingles.book Seite 71 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Select the option Ligh button on the wind
Example of menu use: Exam
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
AA
AA
Lights & visibility Function
Coming Home/ Leaving Home
The lighting duration may be modified, in steps of 10 secon
mum of 90 seconds
The function may also be deactivated.
Indicator conf. With the convenience mode activated, the indicator will blin
Manufacturer's settings The manufacturer's predefined values for the functions of th
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
Cockpit72
. 47 Instrument panel with warning lamps. Some of items of equipment listed here are fitted only on tain models/model years or are optional extras.
altea ingles.book Seite 72 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fig the cer
Cockpit 73
Safety Fir Technical Data
Further information
page 75
page 75
page 76
page 76
page 76
page 76
page 77
page 77
page 77
page 77
page 78
page 78
e filter page 79
page 79
altea ingles.book Seite 73 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps
Fuel level / reserve
Coolant level / coolant temperature
Rear fog light switched on
Turn signals in operation
Trailer turn signals in operation
Main beam switched on
Bulb defective
Cruise control system switched on
Washer fluid level
Parking brake applied
or low brake fluid level or
fault in brake system
Engine oil pressure
ABS system fault
Pollen accumulation in the diesel engine particulat
Alternator fault
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
Cockpit74
page 19
page 80
page 81
page 81
disabled page 28 page 31
page 81
) is
page 81
page 82
page 82
page 82
page 82
page 83
Further information
altea ingles.book Seite 74 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Fasten seat belts!
Tyre pressure
Engine fault (petrol engine)
Glow plug system for diesel engine
If lit: preheating active
If flashing: engine fault
Airbag or belt tension device system fault or airbag
Fault in the emission control system
If flashing: electronic stabilisation programme (ESP
working
If it remains lit: ESP malfunction or off
Automatic selector lever lock (automatic gearbox)
Electromechanical steering
Brake pad wear indicator
Door open indicator
SAFE Electronic immobiliser
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps
A15
A16
A17
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
Cockpit 75
Safety Fir Technical Data
s shows the following message7): PLEASE
rature
s up if the coolant temperature is too
vel is too low.
not go out again after a few seconds.
p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
ls are emitted.
olant level is too low or the coolant temperature
s shows the following message8): CHECK NUAL page 219.
erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
he overheating may be caused by a malfunction
radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
again after driving on for a short distance, stop e engine. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
ion
ion
altea ingles.book Seite 75 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Failure to observe warning lamps and warning messages can result in serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle so that it does not represent a danger.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compart- ment, you must switch off the engine and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 212.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts in the display, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear in the display.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank is down to
the reserve level.
This lights when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity page 209.
The instrument panel display
REFUEL!
Coolant Level* / tempe
The warning lamp light
high or if the coolant le
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does
The warning lamp lights u
three acoustic warning signa
This means that either the co
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The instrument panel display
COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MA
First look at the coolant temp
high if the needle is over the
switch off the engine and wa
If the coolant level is correct, t
of the radiator fan. Check the
sary page 247.
If the warning lamp lights up
the vehicle and switch off th or a qualified workshop.
7) Depending on the model vers 8) Depending on the model vers
Cockpit76
es when the turn signals are in oper-
al is operated, either the left or right indi-
ing lamps will flash at the same time when the
tched on.
rning lamp will start flashing twice as fast.
n signals page 116.
flashes when the turn signals are
caravan or trailer.
when the turn signals are operated, provided a
d connected to the vehicle.
h if one of the turn signals on the trailer fails.
s up when the main beams are on.
p when the main beams are on or when the
16.
altea ingles.book Seite 76 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Coolant level too low
The instrument panel displays shows the following message9): STOP CHECK COOLANT INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn off the engine, turn on the hazard lights and place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 212.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further
information page 111.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flash
ation.
Depending on which turn sign
cator lamp flashes. Both warn
hazard warning lights are swi
If one turn signal fails, the wa
Further information on the tur
Trailer turn signals
This warning lamp also
operated while towing a
The warning lamp flashes
trailer is correctly attached an
The warning lamp will not flas
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp light
The warning lamp lights u
headlight flasher is operated.
Further information page 1
9) Depending on the model version
Cockpit 77
Safety Fir Technical Data
rake
s up if the handbrake is applied, if the
o low or if there is a fault in the brake
up if
with the handbrake on, the following message
panel display 12): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an
oo low page 225.
s shows the following message12): STOP BRAKE .
ake system.
s shows the following message12): BRAKE S MANUAL.
p together with the anti-lock brake system
et, read and observe the warnings on
p does not go out, or if it lights up when l page 225, Brake fluid in the reservoir is
p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
ion
altea ingles.book Seite 77 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message10): LEFT FULL LIGHT FAULT.
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp comes on when the cruise control system
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up when the cruise control system is switched on.
Further notes on the cruise control system page 175.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
page 221.
The following message is shown in the instrument panel display11): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Brake system* / handb
The warning lamp light
brake fluid level falls to
system.
This warning lamp lights
If the handbrake is on
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
will appear in the instrument
audible warning is given.
If the brake fluid level is t
The instrument panel display
FLUID INSTRUCTION MANUAL
If there is a fault in the br
The instrument panel display
SYSTEM FAULT INSTRUCTION
This warning lamp can light u
warning lamp.
WARNING
Before opening the bonn page 212.
If the brake warning lam driving, the brake fluid leve too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.
10) Depending on the model version 11) Depending on the model version 12) Depending on the model vers
Cockpit78
not light up when the ignition is switched on.
t go out again after a few seconds.
p when the vehicle is moving.
in the normal way (except that the ABS control
ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
nformation on the ABS see the page 179.
e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
hts up together with the brake warning lamp
ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
et, read and observe the warnings on engine compartment.
should light up together with the ABS hicle immediately and check the brake fluid 225, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has rk you must not drive on. Risk of accident.
orrect, the fault in the brake system may have e ABS system. This could cause the rear
you brake. This could cause the rear to break the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
altea ingles.book Seite 78 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil page 215.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message13): STOP ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
engine must not even run at idle speed. Obtain technical assistance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
A warning lamp system monitors the ABS.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out again after the system has run through an automatic
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp does
The warning lamp does no
The warning lamp lights u
The vehicle can still be braked
function will not function). Ple
soon as possible. For further i
If a fault occurs in the ABS, th
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp lig
, this indicates not only a fa
in the brake system .
WARNING
Before opening the bonn page 212, Working in the
If the brake warning lamp warning lamp , stop the ve level in the reservoir page dropped below the MIN ma Obtain technical assistance.
If the brake fluid level is c been caused by a failure of th wheels to lock quickly when away. Risk of skidding. Stop
13) Depending on the model version
WARNING (continued)
Cockpit 79
Safety Fir Technical Data
llen build up in the filter is burned. When
dicator turns off.
tivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-
o the road weather conditions, the terrain and tions should never lead to illegal maneouvers
ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- o contact with flammable materials under- comply could result in fire.
als a fault in the alternator.
p when the ignition is switched on. It should go
ted running.
up while driving, the alternator is no longer
uld immediately drive to the nearest qualified
rical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
ttery.
ltage is insufficient for normal vehicle
altea ingles.book Seite 79 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL page 182, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information see page 179,
Brakes.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter
If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the
appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S
gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately
2000 rpm. In this way, the po
cleaning is successful, the in
If the indicator is not deac
shop to repair the fault.
WARNING
Always drive according t traffic. Driving recommenda in surrounding traffic.
The diesel engine partic tures; it should not enter int neath the vehicle. Failure to
Alternator
This warning lamp sign
The warning lamp lights u
out when the engine has star
If the warning lamp lights
charging the battery. You sho
workshop.
You should avoid using elect
because this will drain the ba
If the indicator flashes the vo
operation.
Cockpit80
tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels,
kept pressed while the ignition is on until an
ive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
must be increased to the recommended value
n the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
new tyre pressures are confirmed.
icator lights
el is much lower than the value set by the driver
.
icator flashes
lashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
dicator lights, reduce speed immediately and or braking. Stop when possible, and check
for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre hecked.
ces (for example, in a sports situation, in track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or
the yellow indicator lights after turning the
ff after a brief trip.
altea ingles.book Seite 80 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Tyre pressure
The tyre monitor14) compares wheel revolutions and with this information,
the diameter of each wheel using the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel
changes, the tyre monitor indicator lights . The wheel diameter changes
when:
Tyre pressure is insufficient.
The tyre structure is damaged.
The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load.
The wheels of one axle are under more pressure (for example, driving with
a trailer or on extreme slopes).
The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
The emergency wheel is fitted.
The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to
the button fig. 48 must be
acoustic signal is heard.
If the wheels are under excess
heavy load), the tire pressure
for a full load (see the sticker o
system button is pressed the
The tyre pressure monitor ind
If the tyre pressure of one whe
then the indicator lights
The tyre pressure monitor ind
If the tyre pressure indicator f
specialist workshop.
WARNING
When the tyre pressure in avoid any sudden manoeuvre the tyre pressure and status.
The driver is responsible pressure must be regularly c
Under certain circumstan winter conditions or on a dirt function incorrectly.
Note If the battery is disconnected,
ignition on. This should turn o
14) Depending on the model version
Fig. 48 Central console: tyre monitor system button
Cockpit 81
Safety Fir Technical Data
m*
itors the exhaust system.
an damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
he nearest qualified workshop to have the
s shows the following message15): EXHAUST
g driving which has reduced the quality of the
be fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
op to have the engine checked.
t displayed in the instrument panel display :
P.
programme (ESP)*
itors the electronic stabilisation
ABS, EDL and TCS.
following functions:
conds when the ignition is switched on while a
out.
activated when driving.
ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
ion
altea ingles.book Seite 81 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Engine management
This warning lamp monitors the engine management system
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
is switched on to show that the lamp is working properly. It should go out
when the engine has started running.
If a fault develops in the electronic engine management system while you are
driving, this warning lamp will light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance.
Glow plug system / Engine fault
The warning lamp lights up to show that the glow plugs are
preheating. It flashes if there is an engine fault.
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
warning lamp goes off, the engine should be started straight away.
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engine management system while you are driving,
the glow plug lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
Centre as soon as possible and have the engine checked.
Emission control syste
This warning lamp mon
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that c
speed and drive carefully to t
engine checked.
The instrument panel display
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed durin
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda pro
the nearest qualified worksh
The following information tex
EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHO
Electronic stabilisation
This warning lamp mon
programme.
This programme includes the
The warning lamp has the
It will light for about 2 se
test of the function is carried
It flashes when the ESP is
It will light up continuous
15) Depending on the model vers
Cockpit82
towing). You should take into account that you
ower than normal to steer the vehicle if the
or has failed completely.
SP* the function Recommended steering
page 181.
r*
r only monitors the front brake pads, it is advis-
ds inspected at the same time.
shows the following message16): CHECK
d immediately by a qualified dealership if the .
s or tailgate
e of the doors or the tailgate is open.
o off when all the doors are closed correctly.
he ignition is switched off. It should go off
hicle is locked.
n
altea ingles.book Seite 82 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ESP
operates in conjunction with the ABS.
If the ESP warning lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started,
this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
In this case the ESP can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then
on again. If the warning lamp goes out, this means the system is fully
functional.
Operating the foot brake
The footbrake must be depressed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
necessary when the automatic gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
positions P or N.
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steering, the level of steering assistance depends on
the vehicle's speed and on the steering angle.
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out when the engine has started running.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear
in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no
assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for
will need considerably more p
steering assistance is reduced
For those vehicles fitted with E
manoeuvre is included. See
Brake pad wear indicato
As the brake pad wear indicato
able to have the rear brake pa
The instrument panel displays
BRAKE PADS.
WARNING
Have the brake pads inspecte warning display lights up
Indicator for open door
This indicator lights if on
The warning light should g
The system also works when t
about 15 seconds after the ve
16) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 83
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 83 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Electronic immobiliser* Safe
This warning lamp flashes if an unauthorised key is used.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
lock.
The instrument panel displays shows the following message17): SAFE. The
vehicle cannot be used in that case page 163.
The engine can, however, be started if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
key is used.
Note The vehicle cannot be operated properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
key.
17) Depending on the model version
Steering wheel controls84
he available audio functions from the steering
, to control the available audio functions and
e steering wheel.
control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
io / navigation System, in which case they also
.
box* page 171.
Fig. 50 Controls on the steering wheel
altea ingles.book Seite 84 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Steering wheel controls
General points
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-
matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control t
wheel.
Audio + Telephone version
the telephone system from th
Both versions may be used to
mp3, CD Changer) and the rad
control the Navigation system
Version for automatic gear
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 49 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls 85
Safety Fir Technical Data
Long press
udio CD mp3a) CDC
Continue volume up
ontinue volume down
Fast forward
Rewind
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
altea ingles.book Seite 85 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Button
Short press
Radio CD Audio CD mp3a)
a) Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
CDC Radio CD A
Volume up
Volume down C
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM... N
Silence Pause N
Next preset No function Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward) N
Previous preset No function Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back) N
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls86
Fig. 52 Controls on the steering wheel
Long press
udio CD mp3a) CDC
ontinue volume up
ntinue volume down
rward Change folder
(forward) Fast forward
ind Change folder
(Back) Rewind
altea ingles.book Seite 86 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press
Radio CD Audio CD mp3a) CDC Radio CD A
Volume up C
Volume down Co
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast fo
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rew
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety Fir Technical Data
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
altea ingles.book Seite 87 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Cyclic source control
FM - AM - CD - CDC - FM... N
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak N
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
N
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quite telephone menu
N
a) Only for mp3 compatible radio.*
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls88
Fig. 54 Controls on the steering wheel
Long press
D CD mp3a) CDC
e and the navigation message continuously
e and the navigation message continuously
Fast forward
altea ingles.book Seite 88 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press
Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio C
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volum
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volum
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
AA
AB
AC
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety Fir Technical Data
Rewind
e last Navigation instruction
avigation function is activated.
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
altea ingles.book Seite 89 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat th
Only if the N
Silence Pause N
Next preset No function Change folder
(forward)
Change CD
(forward) N
Previous preset No function Change folder
(back)
Change CD
(Back) N
a) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format b) Button E, rapid flashing: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls90
Fig. 56 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Long press
D CD mp3a) CDC
e and the navigation message continuously
e and the navigation message continuously
rward Change folder
(forward) Fast forward
ind Change folder
(Back) Rewind
altea ingles.book Seite 90 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel
Button
Short press
Radio CD CD mp3a) CDC Radio C
Increase the source volume and the navigation message Increase the source volum
Decrease the source volume and the navigation message Decrease the source volum
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Following track
Station search.
Higher fre-
quency.
Fast fo
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Previous track
Station search.
Lower
frequency
Rew
AA
AB
AC
AD
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety Fir Technical Data
e last Navigation instruction
avigation function is activated.
o specified function
o specified function
o specified function
altea ingles.book Seite 91 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
b)
Cyclic change of source
Radio - CD / CDC - Radio - ...
When in Navigation mode the system leaves the navigation screen.
Repeat th
Only if the N
Voice recognition activation
Press to speak N
Make a call
or
Direct access to the phone book
or
Accept a call
N
Terminate call
or
Refuse call
or
Quite telephone menu
N
a) Only for those Radio-Navigation Systems compatible with the MP3 format b) Button E, rapid flashing: Depending on the equipment, the radio frequency band may be selected.
AE
AF
AG
AH
Steering wheel controls92
on using the simultaneous pressing of the following
Push simultaneously...
AA AB
AA AB
altea ingles.book Seite 92 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Steering wheel lighting controls The lighting is turned
keys:
Fig. 57 Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 58 Steering wheel audio version controls
Audio fig. 58
Audio + Telephone
fig. 57
Unlocking and locking 93
Safety Fir Technical Data
ice consisting of a double lock for the
vation function for the boot in order to
difficult.
d when the vehicle is locked using the key or the
he key, rotate the key once in the door lock
on.
the remote control, press the lock button on the
d, it is not possible to open the doors normally,
e. The boot/tailgate may not be opened. The
ot work.
activated voluntarily by the user.
mes in quick succession (in under 2 seconds).
xecuted using the key or the remote control.
cylinder twice in the locking direction.
the remote control, press the lock button on the
eactivated, the alarm volumetric sensor is also
altea ingles.book Seite 93 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Description
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
the doors and the tailgate from one point.
Central locking can be activated using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating manu-
ally,
the central locking button, (electronic control) in the passenger compart-
ment page 97,
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
page 100.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle security:
- Locking system Safe
- Selective unlocking system*
- Auto-locking to prevent involuntary unlocking
- Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
- Emergency unlocking system
Note For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system Safe
This is an anti-theft dev
door locks and a deacti
make forced entry more
Activation
The safe system is activate
remote control.
To activate this system with t
cylinder in the locking directi
To activate the system using
remote once.
When this system is activate
from the outside or the insid
central locking button does n
Voluntary deactivation
The Safe system can be de
This is done by locking two ti
This double locking can be e
Using the key, rotate the lock
To activate the system using
remote twice.
When the Safe system is d
deactivated.
Unlocking and locking94
ehicle if the Safe deadlock mechanism has ible to open the doors from the inside or the any outside intervention difficult in case of People could become trapped inside in an
tem*
nlocking only the driver's door, or all
king (once). This can be done with the key or
ce in the lock cylinder in the unlock direction.
sed from the Safe system and unlocked and
r is opened, 15 seconds remain for turning on
t, the Safe system will be deactivated on the
indicator will be turned off. For vehicles fitted
eactivated.
s the unlock button on the remote once. The
for all the vehicle, only the driver's door is
rm is turned off as is the light indicator.
oot
oot can be opened, the unlock button on
wice.
ice in under 2 seconds and this will deactivate
ehicle, all doors will be unlocked and the boot
altea ingles.book Seite 94 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
When the Safe system is deactivated, the doors are locked using the simple
locking system, meaning that they may be opened from the interior but not
from the exterior.
Involuntary deactivation
The methods described for deactivation of the Safe system may be
executed involuntarily (for example, if we press the button because we
want to lock the vehicle, and it locks as a result, however, we are not sure that
it is locked and we press the button once more within 2 seconds, we will have
deactivated the Safe system).
Deactivation when opening
To deactivate the system on opening, see Selective unlocking system*
Safe status
On the front left hand side door, there is a light indicator visible from the
outside of the vehicle that indicates the Safe system status.
We can see that the Safe system is activated, by the flashing of the light
indicator. The indicator will flash on all vehicles, whether they are fitted with
an alarm or not, and until the vehicle is unlocked.
We can see that the Safe system is deactivated, when the light indicator
flashes about seven times and turns off. If the vehicle is not fitted with an
alarm then it remains off. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, once 28
seconds have passed since the indicator is switched off, it will start to flash
again and continue until the vehicle is unlocked once more.
Remember:
Safe activated with or without alarm: Indicator flashes continuously.
Safe deactivated without alarm: Indicator flashes about seven times and
turns off.
Safe deactivated with alarm: The indicator flashes about seven times, turns
off and then continues to flash after about 28 seconds.
WARNING
No one should remain in the v been activated. It is not poss outside and this would make emergency. Danger of death. emergency.
Selective unlocking sys
This system allows for u
the vehicle.
Driver's door unlock button
This is done by a simple unloc
the remote control.
With the key, rotate the key on
The driver's door will be relea
may be opened. Once the doo
the ignition, in which momen
remaining doors and the light
with an alarm, this system is d
Using the remote control, pres
Safe system is deactivated
unlocked for opening, the ala
Unlocking all doors and the b
So that all the doors and the b
the remote must be pressed t
The button must be pressed tw
the Safe system for all the v
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety Fir Technical Data
lly unlocks when the key is removed from the
nd opened from the interior (for example when
is, simply operate the lever on the inside of the
ver be operated when the vehicle is running:
ystem
if the airbags are triggered during an accident,
ible to lock the vehicle from inside using the
the ignition off and back on again.
rom the outside, see Manually locking the
altea ingles.book Seite 95 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
will be activated. The indicator will be turned off as will be the alarm for those
vehicles fitted with one.
Unlocking the boot
See page 100 and page 104.
Locking system for involuntary unlocking
This is an anti-theft system and will avoid situations where
the vehicle is opened unintentionally
The vehicle will be re-locked automatically, if it is unlocked and neither the
boot or any of the doors are opened within 30 seconds. This function
prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is
pressed by mistake.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system to prevent access to the vehicle from
the exterior when the vehicle is in transit (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h the unlocked door(s) will be
locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatica
ignition.
Each door may be unlocked a
a passenger gets out). For th
door.
WARNING
The door handles should ne the door will open.
Emergency unlocking s
The entire vehicle is unlocked
except for the boot. It is poss
central locking, after turning
If the doors must be locked f
doors.
Unlocking and locking96
rgency) locked driver's door
cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
e for the right hand side doors.
he door may be opened using the exterior door
ually (emergency) locked doors
unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
e required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
the interior door release lever is operated the
open. The exterior door handle may now be
u wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
ns.
altea ingles.book Seite 96 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door manually
Insert the key in the door lock cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
the left hand side door and anti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
Manual (emergency) locking of the remaining doors
Open the door and remove the cap fig. 59 printed with a lock image.
This will expose a circular element with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
into the groove and rotate the element clockwise for the right hand side doors
and anticlockwise for the left hand side doors.
Replace the cap and close the door. Once the door has been closed it can no
longer be opened from the outside.
Unlocking the manually (eme
Insert the key in the door lock
hand side doors and clockwis
The door lock is released and t
handle.
Unlocking the remaining man
First the driver's door must be
the internal door handle for th
vated on the rear doors, when
door is unlocked but does not
used to open the door.
Note Once the vehicle is open, if yo
repeat the previous instructio Fig. 59 Locking the doors manually
AA
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety Fir Technical Data
ger door cannot be locked if it is open. This
urself out of the vehicle.
e central locking will deactivate the central
. Once this time has passed, the button may be
key may remain inside the vehicle, if the vehicle
cking button when the driver's door is closed
ger door open. If this door is closed, then the
hicle.
eparately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
hildren and disabled people may be trapped
n is not operative in the following cases.
ed from the outside (using the remote or the
activated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
amber colour.
red.
altea ingles.book Seite 97 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Central locking button
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from the inside using
the central locking button.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press the button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except, if the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your
vehicle:
It will not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate from the outside
(this may offer extra safety, for instance when stopped at traffic lights).
The driver or front passen
prevents you from locking yo
Repeated operation of th
locking button for 30 seconds
used once more.
There is a danger that the
is locked using the central lo
and, for example, the passen
keys will remain inside the ve
All doors may be locked s
the door release lever once.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, c inside.
The central locking butto
When the vehicle is lock key).
While the ignition is not with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, button
Vehicle unlocked, button
Fig. 60 Detail of the centre console: central locking system button
Unlocking and locking98
nt of the electronic opening and locking
nly affects the rear doors. It is only
deactivate it manually, as described
ock
n the door you wish to childproof.
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
side doors fig. 61, fig. 62.
f lock
n the door for which you wish to deacti-
.
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he right hand side doors and anti-clock-
ide doors fig. 61, fig. 62.
tivated, the door can be opened from the
ck can be activated and deactivated using the
or is open, as described above.
altea ingles.book Seite 98 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Childproof locks
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors being opened
from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a
door accidentally while the vehicle is moving.
This function is independe
systems of the vehicle. It o
possible to activate it and
below:
Activating the childproof l
Unlock the car and ope
With the door open, rot
tion key, clockwise for t
wise for the right hand
Deactivating the childproo
Unlock the car and ope
vate the childproof lock
With the door open, rot
tion key clockwise for t
wise for the left hand s
When the childproof lock is ac
outside only. The childproof lo
key in the groove when the do
Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 62 Child safety lock on the right hand side door
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety Fir Technical Data
give the plastic key tab to the new owner.
y, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
can result in critical injuries.
isabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
y could mean that the engine is started or that (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could result in
vehicle in an emergency.
hicle keys in the vehicle. Unauthorised use of injury, damage or theft. Always take the key vehicle.
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Risk k could engage suddenly, and you would not be
nts in the key and remote control. Protect the
ssive vibration.
altea ingles.book Seite 99 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Keys
Key set
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a key tab with the number of the key.
The key set belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
one remote control key fig. 63 with folding key bit,
one key without remote control ,
one key tab with the key number.
Plastic key tab
Spare keys cannot be issued without the key number on the key tab fig. 63
. Therefore:
Always keep the key tab in a safe place.
Never leave the key tab in the vehicle.
If you sell the vehicle, please
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement ke
Centre.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the keys
Never leave children or d gency they may not be able
Unsupervised use of a ke electrical equipment is used doors can be locked using th people being trapped in the
Never leave any of the ve your vehicle could result in with you when you leave the
Never remove the key fro of accident. The steering loc able to steer the vehicle.
Caution There are electronic compone
keys from moisture and exce
Fig. 63 Set of keys
AA
AB
AC
AB
Unlocking and locking100
row) on the control, the key shaft is released.
g. 64 .
64 .
he button fig. 64 until all indicators
hen the unlocking button is pressed, 2
e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
the key fig. 64, will flash.
and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
e vehicle. The maximum range of the remote
nditions. The range is reduced when the
is pressed once, the driver's door is
cked.
twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 65 Range of the remote control
A1
A2
A3
A3
A1
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 100 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key can be used to lock and unlock the
vehicle from a distance.
Using the button fig. 64 (ar
Unlocking the vehicle fi
Locking the vehicle fig.
Unlocking the tailgate. Press t
on the vehicle briefly flash. W
minutes remain for opening th
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on
The remote control transmitter
receiver is in the interior of th
control depends on various co
batteries start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button fig. 64
unlocked, all others remain lo
Press the button fig. 64
Fig. 64 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety Fir Technical Data
ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the
s may damage the radio frequency remote
ys replace the dead battery with another of the
nvironment posed of in accordance with regulations
he environment.
ote control key
control key
e been delivered with the vehicle; the key
e normal key page 100, fig. 64
the driver side door using the key
sing the key without the remote control.
he driver side door lock using the key with
age 100, fig. 64 page 100, fig. 65.
0 seconds the following operations must
altea ingles.book Seite 101 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Incorrect use of the key can result in critical injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle; in case of emer- gency they may not be able to leave the vehicle or look after themselves.
Never leave any of the vehicle keys in the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries, accidents or the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Unsupervised use of a key could mean that the engine is started or that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric windows). Risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked using the remote control key. This could result in people being trapped in the vehicle in an emergency.
Note The radio-frequency remote control can also be programmed so that only
the driver's door is unlocked the first time that the unlocking button on the
radio frequency remote control key is pressed. When the button is pressed
once more, all doors and the tailgate will be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 100,
fig. 65 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, the vehicle will be
locked again automatically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened
within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle. This function prevents the vehicle
from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.
If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 101.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does n
battery must be replaced.
Caution Use of inappropriate batterie
control. For this reason, alwa
same size and power.
For the sake of the e The flat batteries must be dis
governing the protection of t
Synchronising the rem
Synchronising the remote
Use both keys that hav
with the remote and th
page 100, fig. 65.
Unlock the vehicle from
without the remote.
Turn the ignition ON u
Lock the vehicle from t
the remote control p
In a time of maximum 3 be carried out:
A1
Unlocking and locking102
r an alarm?
f the following unauthorised actions are carried
vehicle with the vehicle key
alarm
d the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
times depending on the country.
lly (emergency opening)
fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
the button shown by the (arrow).
door to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
alarm is not triggered immediately.
in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
you do not switch on the ignition within 15
d.
?
via the unlocking button of the remote control
the ignition lock.
altea ingles.book Seite 102 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Operate the button once for locking on the remote control, the
indicators will flash.
Operate the button once for unlocking on the remote control
for more than 2 seconds.
The key will have been programmed and the vehicle will unlock,
confirming at the same time the synchronisation.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer be opened and closed with the
remote control if the button is repeatedly pressed outside of the effective
range of the radio frequency remote control. The remote control key will have
to be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys are available from Authorised Service Centres, they
must be matched to the locking system.
Up to eight remote control keys can be used.
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers an alarm if unauthorised move-
ments are detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the
mechanical key, or if unauthorised access is gained to the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when the vehicle is
locked. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigge
The system triggers an alarm i
out when the car is locked:
Mechanical opening of the
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the tailgate
Switching on the ignition
Movements in the vehicle
Undue manipulation of the
Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound an
This may be repeated up to 10
Opening the doors mechanica
If the remote control function
car. This is done as follows:
Unfold the key by pressing
Use the lock on the driver
system remains active, but an
Switch on the ignition with
on, the electronic immobiliser
the anti-theft alarm system. If
seconds, the alarm is triggere
How is the alarm switched off
When the vehicle is unlocked
or when the key is inserted in
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety Fir Technical Data
em remains deactivated if the volumetric
ich a separate sunblind is fitted in the e alarm will not function correctly due to inter-
gered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
icator on the driver's door. This flashing will be
ted alarm.
altea ingles.book Seite 103 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note If, after the alarm goes off, access is gained to a second secured zone
(e.g. the tailgate is opened after a door has been opened), the warning signal
is triggered again.
Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or
not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
nected while the alarm system is active.
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control function incorporated in the anti-theft
alarm*, that detects unauthorized vehicle entry using ultra-
sound.
The system consists of 3 sensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
Activation
It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
The safe security syst sensor is deactivated.
For those vehicles in wh passenger compartment, th ference with the sensor.
Note If the alarm has been trig
cated by a flashing of the ind
different to that for an activa
Unlocking and locking104
r and lift the tailgate fig. 66. The tail-
of the two handles on the interior lining
ht movement.
erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
erative and the boot may be opened.
tus, press the button or the button on
ument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
ing is also given if the tailgate is opened while
an 6 km/h.*
Fig. 67 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 104 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Tailgate
Opening and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release leve
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
Grip the tailgate by one
and close it, using a lig
The system may or may not op
If the tailgate is locked then it
then the opening system is op
To the locking / unlocking sta
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instr
erly closed.* An audible warn
the vehicle is moving faster th
Fig. 66 Boot lid: opening from the outside
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety Fir Technical Data
to be opened if the central locking
xample if the battery is flat)
oot allowing access to the emergency
inside the luggage compartment
groove and unlock the locking system,
ght to left, as shown by the arrow
Fig. 68 Boot lid: emer- gency open
altea ingles.book Seite 105 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
The tailgate must not be opened when the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may damage the lighting units.
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the window. The glass could shatter. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing. If not, it may open unexpect- edly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year. This could cause serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gasses may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If only the boot is opened then do not leave the key inside. The vehicle may not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle
does not operate (for e
There is a groove in the b
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from
Insert the key bit in the
turning the key from ri
fig. 68.
Unlocking and locking106
t left door
t right door
ting the electric window buttons in the rear
left door
right door
oor can be used to disable the electric window
ttons on rear doors are activated.
s on rear doors are deactivated.
ric windows can result in injury.
ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and others. Make sure that no
w.
ey with you when you leave the vehicle.
sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if . Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric he doors can be locked using the remote in people being trapped in the vehicle in an
work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.
altea ingles.book Seite 106 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated using the
controls in the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open a window.
Pull button to close a window .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons in the driver door
Button for window in fron
Button for window in fron
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactiva
doors
Button for window in rear
Button for window in rear
Safety switch *
Safety switch in the driver d
buttons in the rear doors.
Safety switch not pressed: bu
Safety switch pressed: button
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elect
Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou one is in the path of a windo
Always take the vehicle k
Never leave children or di they have access to the keys the engine is started or that windows). Risk of accident. T control key. This could result emergency.
The electric windows will ignition and one of the front
Fig. 69 Detail of driver door: controls for the front and rear windows
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety Fir Technical Data
. 69 and have two levels for opening the
. This makes it easier to open or close windows
ork when the ignition has been switched off,
on.
e function will not work if the battery has been
if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
ll-back function. This reduces the risk
dows are closing.
when closing automatically, the window stops
ediately .
mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
sumes.
ructed, the window stops at this point.
on why the window cannot be closed, try to
nds.
seconds, the window will open fully when you
ne-touch closing is reactivated.
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
A1 A2
altea ingles.book Seite 107 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If necessary, use the safety switch to disable the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.
Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again page 107. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
Pull up the button for the window briefly to the second position.
The window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the button for the window briefly to the second posi-
tion. The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close all windows.
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 106, fig
window and two for closing it
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not w
even if the key is in the igniti
The automatic open and clos
temporarily disconnected, or
reactivated.
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
Roll-back function
The windows have a ro
of injuries when the win
If a window is obstructed
at this point and lowers imm
If this happens, check im
could not be closed before at
normal automatic function re
If the window is still obst
If there is no obvious reas
close it again within five seco
If you wait longer than 5 - 10
operate one of the buttons. O
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking108
the remote control for about 3 seconds.
tion electrically will be either opened or
to interrupt the function.
ompletely closed, the indicators will
f*
e sliding/tilting roof
of is opened and closed using the
ignition is switched on.
Fig. 70 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control
altea ingles.book Seite 108 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury.
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
page 108.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock button on
All windows which func
closed.
Press the unlock button
Once the windows are c
flash.
Sliding/tilting roo
Opening and closing th
The sliding/tilting sunro
rotary button when the
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety Fir Technical Data
isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld result in people being trapped in the vehicle
of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.
or lock of the driver's door in the locking
ng/tilting sunroof is closed.
rrupt this function.
n the remote control for about 3 seconds.
roof is closed.
n to interrupt the function.
tary button remains in the last position selected
venience closing from outside the vehicle and
the next time you drive.
altea ingles.book Seite 109 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position page 108, fig. 70 .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunshade
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou in an emergency.
The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the do
position until the slidi
Release the key to inte
Using the remote control
Push the lock button o
The sliding/tilting sun
Press the unlock butto
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof ro
if the roof is closed using con
will have to be re-positioned
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking110
d against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
n immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
een opened again by the roll-back function, it
g the rotary button at the front in position
ing roof has closed fully. Please note that the t the roll-back function.
eakdown
he sunroof may be closed manually.
y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
the spring) and close the sliding roof.
tion.
AA
altea ingles.book Seite 110 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not
prevent fingers getting pinche
sunroof stops and opens agai
If the sliding/tilting roof has b
can be closed only by pressin
fig. 71 until the sliding/tilt
sunroof will now close withou
Operation in the event of a br
In the event of a breakdown, t
Remove the plastic cover b
Remove the lever from the
as possible (pushing against
Fit the lever back into posiFig. 71 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control
Fig. 72 Emergency closing handle
Lights and visibility 111
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts*
osition or to the first stop. The
switch lights up.
lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
osition or to the second stop
lights up in the control panel.
lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
osition to the last stop. A warning lamp
ent panel.
e lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
hts will only work with the ignition on. The side
when the ignition is turned off.
r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
iver door is opened. This is a reminder to switch
altea ingles.book Seite 111 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 73 to position .
Switching on dipped headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog ligh
Pull the switch out of p
symbol in the light
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the switch out of p
. A warning lamp
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the switch out of p
lights up in the instrum
WARNING
Never drive with just the sid not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.
Note The dipped beam headlig
lights come on automatically
If the lights are left on afte
a buzzer sounds when the dr
off the lights.
Fig. 73 Detailed view of dash panel lights, fog light and rear fog light control
Lights and visibility112
0.
ition, as soon as visibility conditions are
atically activated. The indication Auto,
trol is switched on, dipped headlights are auto-
t-sensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
the headlights if the continuous wipe function
5 seconds. The dipped beam headlights are
wipe or the intermittent wipe functions are
55 seconds.
trol is switched on, the headlights will not be ain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
automatic headlight system, when the key is
acoustic signal will only sound if the light
r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
matic light function is switched on, the fog
be switched on in addition.
cribed here is subject to the relevant statutory
altea ingles.book Seite 112 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
If the coming home* feature is activated, the acoustic signal for the
dipped beam headlights will not sound, it will sound if the position lights are
activated.
The rear fog light is so bright that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
Turn the light switch to
When the switch is in this pos
reduced, the lights are autom
changes to red.
Automatic lighting
If the automatic headlight con
matically switched on by a ligh
example.
The rain function switches on
is switched on for longer than
switched off if the continuous
switched off for longer than 2
WARNING
If automatic headlight con switched on in fog or heavy r switched on manually.
Note For those vehicles with the
removed from the ignition, the
control is in the position o
home function.
If the daylight driving auto
lights or rear fog light cannot
The use of the lighting des
requirements.
Fig. 74 Automatic lighting
Lights and visibility 113
Safety Fir Technical Data
n the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
ng home function will light the dipped beam
registration plate lighting for about 40 seconds.
sition 0 the leaving home function is not acti-
n during the night for short trips using the
ill place a heavy demand on the battery. To
eys whenever possible.
tory requirements when using the lighting
ith the Dot Matrix display, the time for the
t 40 seconds) can be adjusted using the
ibility menu.
altea ingles.book Seite 113 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
Coming home / leaving home function*
After dark the area around the car is lit up with the aid of the
coming home / leaving home function.
Coming home function*
To activate the function
Put the light switch into the position or in the Auto position
for those vehicles fitted with the automatic lighting function.
Remove key from ignition switch.
To deactivate the function
Turn light switch to position 0.
When the system is activated and it is dark the dipped headlights, rear lights
and number plate lights come on for 40 seconds, after the vehicle has been
closed.
While one of the doors or the tailgate are open, the dipped headlights, the
rear lights and the registration plate lighting remain on for about 90 seconds.
If, before this time is up, all of the doors and the tailgate are closed, another
40 seconds of lighting is given. However, if all of the doors and the tailgate
are closed after the 90 seconds have passed, the system will be deactivated
and the lights will not come on.
If you wish to reactivate the system, you must start from the beginning.
The lighting time is defined at the time of manufacture.
Leaving home function*
The function is activated whe
control. In the dark, the leavi
lights, the rear lights and the
When the light control is in po
vated.
Note If the vehicle is used ofte
coming home function, this w
avoid this, make longer journ
Observe all relevant statu
systems described here.
For those vehicles fitted w
Coming home function (abou
Configuration, lights and vis
Lights and visibility114
trol
mps (xenon lamps) are equipped with
rol. This means that the headlights will be
of the vehicle and nodding movements when
tomatically compensated for.
mps do not have headlight range control.
hts*
nds the headlights will light the most
oad.
er illumination of the side of the road when
dynamic lighting is controlled automatically
eering wheel angle.
at different angles to avoid that the front of the
e dark.
Fig. 76 Cornering lighting using directional headlights
altea ingles.book Seite 114 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel fig. 75 .
Those vehicles fitted with xenon gas discharge headlights are fitted with an
automatic headlight range system.
Headlight range control
Using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the headlight
range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. In this way it is
possible to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic more than necessary. At the same
time, the driver has the best possible lighting for the road ahead using the
correct headlight settings.
The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
To lower the beam, turn the thumb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
Dynamic headlight range con
Vehicles with gas discharge la dynamic headlight range cont adjusted to suit the load level
pulling off and braking are au
Vehicles with gas discharge la
Self directional headlig
When driving around be
important areas of the r
This cornering light gives bett
driving through a corner. The
according to speed and the st
The two main headlights move
vehicle is left completely in th
Fig. 75 Instrument panel: regulation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
Lights and visibility 115
Safety Fir Technical Data
engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
r to P.
le to draw the attention of other road users
e key with you when you leave the vehicle.
ard warning lights to warn other road users, for
traffic jam
due to a technical defect
hicle or your vehicle is being towed.
neously when the hazard warning lights are
two turn signal indicator lamps and the
will flash at the same time. The hazard
n the ignition is switched off.
dicators
n on automatically when braking sharply at a
e ABS works for a prolonged period, in order to
ou accelerate, or continue at over 40km/h, the
f automatically.
creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always ts and a warning triangle to draw the attention tationary vehicle.
talytic converter could come into contact with r the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt !
altea ingles.book Seite 115 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note The system operates from a speed of about 10 km/h.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of
other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.
If your vehicle breaks down:
1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic.
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox
move the selector leve
6. Use the warning triang
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicl
You should switch on the haz
instance when:
reaching the tail end of a
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down
you are towing another ve
All turn signals flash simulta
switched on. That is that the
indicator lamp in the switch warning lights also work whe
Turning on the emergency in
The emergency indicators tur
speed of over 60km/h, or if th
alert the vehicles behind. If y
emergency indicators turn of
WARNING
The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning ligh of other road users to your s
Never park where the ca inflammable materials unde petrol. This could start a fire
Fig. 77 Instrument panel: switch for hazard warning lights
Lights and visibility116
als
ay up fig. 78 to indicate right, and
indicate left.
r down to the point where you incur
ease the lever. The turn signal will flash
sponding warning lamp will also flash.
nd off
position .
fig. 78 to switch on the main
rds you to switch the main beam head-
he steering wheel to operate the
ts
nd remove the key from the lock.
wn to turn on the right or left-hand
ely.
A1
A2
A3
A4
altea ingles.book Seite 116 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note The battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
time, even if the ignition is switched off.
The use of the hazard warning lights described here is subject to the rele-
vant statutory requirements.
Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn sign
Move the lever all the w
all the way down to
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up o
resistance and then rel
several times. The corre
Switching main beam on a
Turn the light switch to
Press the lever forward
beams.
Pull the lever back towa
lights off again.
Headlight flasher
Pull the lever towards t
flasher.
Switching on parking ligh
Switch off the ignition a
Move the lever up or do
parking lights respectiv
Fig. 78 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever
A2
A1
Lights and visibility 117
Safety Fir Technical Data
e 1
ed to select the following positions:
(not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ut 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The
f when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition
n .
n O fig. 79.
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
altea ingles.book Seite 117 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other drivers.
Note The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
sponding warning lamp or flashes in the combi-instrument. The
warning lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated, provided a
trailer is correctly attached and connected to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb
is defective, the warning lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn
signal bulbs are damaged, warning lamp does not light up. You should
have the bulb replaced.
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then comes on in the combi-
instrument.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then comes on in the
combi-instrument.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Interior front light, typ
The switch fig. 79 is us
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position
ically switched on when the v
ignition lock and turn off abo
interior lights are switched of
is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the positio
AA
Lights and visibility118
n .
n O fig. 80.
closed, the interior lights will be switched off
iding the key has been removed and the cour-
his prevents the battery discharging.
altea ingles.book Seite 118 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Interior front light, type 2
The switch fig. 80 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock and turn off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The
interior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition
is switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to the positio
Note If not all the vehicle doors are
after approx. 10 minutes, prov
tesy light position selected. T
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
AA
Lights and visibility 119
Safety Fir Technical Data
hts
on to switch off the reading light.
ng lights*
ed to select the following positions:
, the interior and reading lights are switched
t
(left reading light) or to position (right
. The interior lights are automatically switched
ed or the key removed from the ignition lock The
Fig. 83 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.
1
A4
altea ingles.book Seite 119 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button fig. 81 and fig. 82 to switch on
the reading light.
Switching off the reading lig
Press the corresponding butt
Rear interior and readi
The switch fig. 83 is us
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position fig. 83
off.
Switching on the reading ligh
Turn the switch to position
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position
on when the vehicle is unlock
Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1
Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2
AB AB
AC
A
A2
A3
Lights and visibility120
d the front passenger can be pulled out of their
vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 84
n visors have covers. When you open the cover
p.
ll go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
d back up.
ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-
ttery discharging.
altea ingles.book Seite 120 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
light turns off about 20 seconds after the closure of the doors. The interior
lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver an
mountings in the centre of the
.
The make-up mirrors in the su
, a lamp in the roof lights u
The lamp* in the roof lining wi
back or the sun visor is pushe
Note The roof lamp will turn off abo
tion key. This prevents the ba
A5
Fig. 84 Sun visor on the driver side
A1
A2
Lights and visibility 121
Safety Fir Technical Data
the left or right to set the length of the
e left: long intervals; control to the right:
per interval stages can be set using switch
osition .
osition .
position to give the windscreen a brief
art to move faster if you keep the lever
er than 2 seconds.
system
he steering wheel - Position . The wash
ediately and the wipers will start with a
and wiper systems will function at the
f over 120 km/h.
ipers will keep running for approximately
in the wiper blade* area (page
ome versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
turning the exterior heated rearview mirror*
.
A2
A3
A4
A5
altea ingles.book Seite 121 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Windscreen washers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 85 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Move the control to
intervals. Control to th
short intervals. Four wi
.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to p
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to p
Brief wipe
Move the lever down to
wipe. The wiper will st
pressed down for long
Wash and wipe automatic
Pull the lever towards t
function will start imm
slight delay. The wash
same time at speeds o
Release the lever. The w
four seconds.
Optional heated windscreen
In some countries and with s
the windscreen in the area of
icing in the zone.
This function is activated by
control forwards page 126
Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
A1
AA
AA
Lights and visibility122
pe function is on, the intervals are directly
s way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
way any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
he obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
back on again.
ts that may be trapped in the side areas of the
wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
ted jets is controlled automatically when the
ding upon the outside temperature.
altea ingles.book Seite 122 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 222.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.
The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
page 121, fig. 85 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again.
The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated while the vehicle is in
transit (automatic function). If you activate the wipers less than three
seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the
last wipe. To reactivate the automatic function the ignition must be turned
off and on again.
When the intermittent wi
proportional to the speed. Thi
the intervals.
The wiper will try to wipe a
The wiper will stop moving if t
obstacle and switch the wiper
Before removing any objec
windscreen, always move the
The heat output of the hea
ignition is switched on, depen
A2
A3
Lights and visibility 123
Safety Fir Technical Data
sor
iper lever into position fig. 87.
the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
interval wipe function. You will have to switch
switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
n off and back on.
windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
ults.
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 123 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sen
Move the windscreen w
Move the control to
rain sensor. Control to
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the
the rain sensor back on if you
the wiper intermittent functio
Note Do not put stickers on the
cause sensor disruption or fa
Fig. 86 Rain sensor*
Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper lever
AA
Lights and visibility124
en wiper and washer system
ards to position fig. 88. The wash
diately and the wiper will start with a
reen wash system will function as long as
is position.
iper then wipes for approximately 4
tervals again.
asher system stops and the wipers func-
e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
nding warnings on page 222.
k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
ass, this could damage both the wiper blade
only function when the ignition is switched on
indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
pe.
A7
altea ingles.book Seite 124 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position fig. 88. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscre
Press the lever fully forw
function will start imme
slight delay. The windsc
you hold the lever in th
Release the lever. The w
seconds, and then in in
Release the lever. The w
tion.
WARNING
A worn or dirty wiper blad
Always note the correspo
Caution In icy conditions, always chec
before using the wiper for the
wiper blade is frozen to the gl
and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wiper will
and the tailgate is closed.
In reverse gear, with the w
screen wiper will make one wi
Fig. 88 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper
A6
A6
Lights and visibility 125
Safety Fir Technical Data
interior mirror*
zle function can be switched on and off
function
. 89. Warning lamp goes out.
function
. 89. Warning lamp is lit.
tivated every time the ignition is switched on.
ts up in the mirror housing.
is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives (for example from the
d). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
Fig. 89 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
AB
altea ingles.book Seite 125 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Headlight washer system
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note
To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle
The automatic anti-daz
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Switching on anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is ac
The green indicator lamp ligh
When the anti-dazzle function
matically according to the am
headlights of a vehicle behin
reverse gear is engaged.
AA
AA
Lights and visibility126
position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle.
(right exterior mirror).
to position the mirror so that you have a
f the car .
rs*
to the central position fig. 90 so
w mirrors heat up and the heated wind-
de rest area is operational page 121.
*
90 to position to fold in the exterior
ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
matic car wash. This will help prevent
ith convenience control*
ror will fold back automatically with
ith the remote or the key).
the door and use the contact.
ck out to the extended position*
r position to fold the exterior mirrors back
tment
osition L (left exterior mirror).
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 126 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob fig. 90 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to
good view to the rear o
3. Turn knob to position R
4. Swivel the rotary knob
good view to the rear o
Heating the exterior mirro
Turn the knob forwards
that the heated rear vie
screen* in the wiper bla
Folding in exterior mirrors
Turn the control fig.
mirrors. You should alw
driving through an auto
damage.
Folding rear view mirrors w
The outer rear view mir
convenience closing (w
To unfold it again, open
Folding exterior mirrors ba
Turn the knob to anothe
out .
Synchronised mirror adjus
1. Turn the control to the p
Fig. 90 Exterior mirror control
Lights and visibility 127
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 127 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Fuel is wasted otherwise.
Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The rear view mirrors can be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
described before.
Seats and stowage128
he foot well when the vehicle is moving; never out of the window or on the seat. This also correct sitting position exposes you to an event of a braking manoeuvre or an accident. could sustain severe injuries due to an incor-
er and front passenger to maintain a distance ering wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect
s that the airbag will not protect you. Risk of ween the driver and the steering wheel or and the dash panel should always be as great
passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle e the risk of an accident and therefore injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting
nts.
to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in .
altea ingles.book Seite 128 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger places, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to suit
the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat position
is very important for:
fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
relaxed posture that does not cause drowsiness,
safe driving page 7,
and to ensure that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum
protection page 19.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
Never transport more people than there are seats available in the vehicle.
Every occupant in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet in t rest them on the dash panel, applies to passengers. An in increased risk of injury in the If the airbag is triggered, you rect sitting position.
It is important for the driv of at least 25 cm from the ste the minimum distance mean fatal injury. The distance bet between the front passenger as possible.
Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal accide
Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal the page 46, Child safety
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage 129
Safety Fir Technical Data
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head and, as a very minimum at eye level
2.
page 130.
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could lead to death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the occu-
Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
altea ingles.book Seite 129 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
occupant protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
fig. 91 and fig. 9
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus pant's size.
Fig. 91 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
Seats and stowage130
aint, press the button and push head
d restraint engages securely in one of its
ats)
t forward or back to the required position.
int
up as far as it will go.
93 (arrow).
of fitting without releasing the button.
t into the guides on the rear backrest.
wn.
nt to suit body size page 14 and
straints have been removed. Risk of injury.
straints are in an unsuitable position, there is
straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.
warnings page 129, Correct adjustment
altea ingles.book Seite 130 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restr
restraint downwards.
Make sure that the hea
positions page 14.
Angle adjustment (front se
Press the head restrain
Removing the head restra
Push the head restraint
Press the button fig.
Pull head restraint out
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrain
Push head restraint do
Adjust the head restrai
page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head re
Never drive if the head re a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro
Please observe the safety of head restraints.
Fig. 93 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and stowage 131
Safety Fir Technical Data
t angle
e backrest and turn the hand wheel.
support*
e backrest and turn the hand wheel to
port.
cushioned area is determined by the settings
his supports the natural curvature of the spine
r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat tionary.
ry to the driver and front passenger during or an accident, never drive with the backrest ximum protection of the seat belt can be krests are in an upright position and the driver operly adjusted their seat belts. The further e rear, the greater the risk of injury due to
belt web!
djusting the seat height or forwards/back- be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
altea ingles.book Seite 131 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in fig. 94 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backres
Take your weight off th
Adjusting the lumbar
Take your weight off th
adjust the lumbar sup
The backrest curvature of the
made in the lumbar region. T
very effectively.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of fatal accide only when the vehicle is sta
To reduce the risk of inju sudden braking manoeuvres tilted far to the rear. The ma achieved only when the bac and front passenger have pr the backrests are tilted to th improper positioning of the
Exercise caution when a wards position. Injuries can care and attention.
Fig. 94 Front left seat controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and stowage132
Fig. 96 For unlocking the rear seat
Fig. 97 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment
altea ingles.book Seite 132 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Turn the appropriate thumb wheel fig. 95 to switch on the seat
heating. The seat heating is switched off in the 0 position.
The seat heating only works when the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
wheel controls the left seat and the right thumb wheel the right seat.
Caution To avoid damaging the heating elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.
Rear seat bench
Seat adjustment
Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
Seats and stowage 133
Safety Fir Technical Data
sts down
e of the seat fig. 98 .
s locked. This is the reason why the loop located
e pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the
e backrest has engaged properly in position
s on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be
Fig. 98 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 133 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The seats may be moved forwards or backwards independently. The
movement can be 1/3 or 2/3 of the seat. There are various possible
positions.
Adjusting reach
In the seated position, unlock the lever in the direction of the
arrow page 132, fig. 96.
Move the seat cushion forwards or backwards to the desired
position.
Backrest angle adjustment
Hold the backrest at the top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat
page 132, fig. 97 in the direction of the arrow and hold the
loop in this position. Push the backrest to the required position
and release the loop.
WARNING
Adjust the seat only when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise your seat could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is moving. This could increase the risk of an accident and therefore injury.
Do not push the seatbacks down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid damage to the centre console.
Ensure that the seat, once moved, is fixed in position.
Note In order to maintain the maximum luggage compartment space, put the
seatbacks in position normal, without moving.
In order to maintain the maximum space without putting the seatbacks
down, move the seats forward to the desired position.
Folding the seat backre
Pull the loop on the sid
In this position the back rest i
on the side of the seat must b
backrest.
WARNING
You should check that th after the loop is released.
The locking system loop used to secure any items.
A1
Seats and stowage134
ments
on the front passenger side
ed by pulling the lever fig. 100.
partment cover closed while the vehicle is in njury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or
Fig. 100 Passenger side: stowage compartment
altea ingles.book Seite 134 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Folding the rear seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 99 in the direction
of the arrow and lift the seat backrest into position.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.
After locking the seat backrest into position ensure that the seat belts protrude from the seat.
Stowage compart
Stowage compartment
The compartment can be open
WARNING
Always keep the stowage com motion to reduce the risk of i in the event of an accident.
Fig. 99 Folding or opening the front seat backrests
A1
Seats and stowage 135
Safety Fir Technical Data
this compartment.
he front seats*
er with a cover under each front seat.
opened by pushing the button and putting the
of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
he 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
.
e cover until it locks into position.
Fig. 102 Stowage area under the front seats
altea ingles.book Seite 135 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Centre arm rest at front with stowage area
There is a stowage area in the armrest.
To open the stowage area, lift the armrest up in the direction of
the arrow fig. 101 and then lift the cover.
To access the CD loader* or the lower stowage area, pull on the
armrest cover without pressing on the button.
To close the stowage area, push the armrest down.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage area closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury from the armrest during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident.
Note The CD changer is located in
Stowage areas under t
There is a stowage lock
The drawer* fig. 102 is
cover back.
There are two open positions
sure applied to the cover. In t
too much pressure is applied
To close the drawer, press th
Fig. 101 Front armrest with stowage area
AA
Seats and stowage136
t be folded down whilst the vehicle is in on the second row of seats. There is a risk on ng manoeuvre! The table must therefore be whilst the vehicle is in motion.
the drink holders. During normal or sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be
en cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
and could damage the vehicle.
ent*
compartments in the roof
Fig. 104 Roof stowage compartments
altea ingles.book Seite 136 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
The drawers will hold a maximum weight of 1.5 kg.
Do not drive with the drawer cover open. There is an injury risk for passengers if the cargo is released in case of sudden braking or an accident.
Folding table*
Folding tables are fitted to the rear of the front seat backrests.
To open the table, open it up in the direction of the arrow
fig. 103.
WARNING
The folding tables may no motion and anyone is seated injury during a sudden braki closed and properly secured
Never place hot drinks in driving manoeuvres, sudden spilled. Danger of scalding.
Caution When driving, do not leave op
spilt on braking, for example,
Roof stowage compartm
There are four stowage
Fig. 103 Folding table of front left seat
Seats and stowage 137
Safety Fir Technical Data
rtment floor and fold it back all the way
fig. 106, into the side grooves depending
ts to be transported. The onboard tool kit
re located underneath the luggage
ned for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
move.
um authorised weight for the vehicle
Fig. 106 Luggage compartment divider
altea ingles.book Seite 137 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Press the button on the cover to open these compartments
page 136, fig. 104. The cover will then open.
To close the cover, press it up until it engages.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage area cover closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce the risk of injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the event of an accident and to prevent any items from being thrown through the vehicle interior.
Stowage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart-
ment floor.
Lift the luggage compa
fig. 105.
Fit the separator on the size of the objec
and the spare wheel a
compartment.
Note The folding table is desig
loads fold up the table and re
Do not exceed the maxim
page 276.
Fig. 105 Foldable luggage compartment cover
AA
Seats and stowage138
und:
rear),
gage compartment,
in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles
kit*.
on the rear roof handles.
s on the dashboard. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. r cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
fall from the centre console or other stowage l while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a ou will not be able to use the brake, clutch or
t hooks must not restrict the driver's view. oks are intended only for use with light arti- any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging dden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the
altea ingles.book Seite 138 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Luggage compartment net
There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for
securing objects.
Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage
compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 107.
Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
loads fold up the table and remove.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle
page 276.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be fo
in the centre console,
in the door trims (front and
in the side trims of the lug
in the spare wheel recess
with an optional anti-puncture
The clothes hooks are located
WARNING
Do not store loose object flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking o accident.
Ensure that no objects can areas into the driver foot wel sudden braking manoeuvre, y accelerator. Risk of accident.
Clothing hung on the coa Risk of accident. The coat ho cles of clothing. Do not leave articles of clothing. During su cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.
Fig. 107 Retaining net
Seats and stowage 139
Safety Fir Technical Data
rest*
Fig. 109 Opening the rear drink holders
Fig. 110 Rear armrest/drink holder
altea ingles.book Seite 139 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Drinks holders at the front
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
fig. 108.
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear drink holder*/ Arm
Fig. 108 Front drink holder
Seats and stowage140
mpartment
tion of the rear seat back rest, in order to
n of the back rest.
compartment mounting plate
ide of the vehicle, through the rear
ould be fitted between the back rest and
seat area.
lips the cushion frame. The rings of the
rtment mounting plate appear at the front
he plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the
slightly and then lean the back rest back-
g of the mobile stowage compartment
e easier.
Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate
AH
altea ingles.book Seite 140 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Opening and closing the armrest*/ drink holder*
To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 139,
fig. 109 .
To close, lift the Drink holder*/ armrest* in the direction of the
arrow page 139, fig. 110 .
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 138.
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - Fitting and removal
This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fitting mobile stowage co
Fold down the small sec
access the large sectio
Fit the mobile stowage
fig. 112 from the ins
section of the seat. It sh
the seat, in the central
Push the plate until it c
mobile stowage compa
of the seat.
If it is difficult to make t
large section forwards
wards to make the fittin
onto the mounting plat
A1
A2
Fig. 111 Mobile stowage compartment Installation
Seats and stowage 141
Safety Fir Technical Data
stowage compartment - General
ent may only be placed in the central
Fig. 113 Mobile stowage compartment Opening
Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Duties
altea ingles.book Seite 141 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the
central seat.
Set both mounting pieces together page 140, fig. 111,
with both mounting rings page 140, fig. 112 and press
hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile stowage compartment
Pull each of the buttons page 140, fig. 111 on the clips
(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.
Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage
compartment mounting plate.
Multi-purpose* mobile information
This stowage compartm
area of the rear seat
AE
AG
AF
Seats and stowage142
ng, keep the tables stored inside the mobile he cover closed, and likewise when they are
the drink holders. The drink may spill and e is moving.
rinkholder when the vehicle is in motion, may be flung around the vehicle and cause
ing plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion
se, store inside the stowage compartment.
e compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.
age compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it
x and checking that both safety clips are
s.
altea ingles.book Seite 142 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Opening
Lift the cover , in area page 141, fig. 113.
Closing
Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile stowage compartment
The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not
damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior
of the vehicle.
The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-
zines.
The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table page 141, fig. 114, it must be removed from its
compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into
compartment page 141, fig. 114 on the front section of the mobile
stowage compartment.
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart-
ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left-
hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.
Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.
Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
When the vehicle is movi stowage compartment with t not in use
Never place hot drinks in cause burns when the vehicl
Do not leave cans in the d there is a danger that the can injury.
Make sure that the mount frame.
When the plate is not in u
When the mobile stowag be fastened by the retaining
Note Check that the mobile stow
forwards by the front glove bo
correctly clipped onto the ring
AB AA
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage 143
Safety Fir Technical Data
lighter fig. 116 to activate it .
op out slightly.
ighter and light the cigarette on the
ette lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
e cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence hter can cause burns, risk of injury.
hen the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children unsupervised in the
Fig. 116 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console
altea ingles.book Seite 143 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 115.
To close, lower the cover
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray.
Cigarette lighter*
Press on the cigarette
Wait for the lighter to p
Pull out the cigarette l
glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigar a fire.
Take care when using th when using the cigarette lig
The lighter only works w running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.
Fig. 115 Ashtray located in the front drinks holder
Seats and stowage144
s with the engine switched off will drain the
l accessories, see the instructions on
ion (AUX-IN)
g. 118.
the radio manual).
Fig. 118 Auxiliary audio connection
altea ingles.book Seite 144 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt socket in the front
centre console fig. 117 of the passenger compartment and that of the
boot* The appliances connected to each socket must not exceed a power
rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The current sockets and the connected accessories will only operate when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Note Using electrical appliance
battery.
Before using any electrica
page 207.
Auxiliary audio connect
Lift the AUX. cover fi
Insert the pin fully (see
Fig. 117 Socket, centre console, front
Seats and stowage 145
Safety Fir Technical Data
s located in the centre arm rest.
e use of this equipment, please see the Radio
Fig. 120 iPod connection in central armrest compartment.
altea ingles.book Seite 145 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
AUX RSE connection*
This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or
audio and video connector (red, white and yellow connectors). For more
details about the use of this audio and video source, see the RSE manual.
Apple* iPod connector
The iPod connection i
For information concerning th
handbook.
Fig. 119 AUX RSE connection
Seats and stowage146
ing triangle, fire
Fig. 122 Warning triangle storage under the rear cover
Fig. 123 Opening the storage compartment
altea ingles.book Seite 146 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
USB* Connection
Inside the central armrest compartment there is a USB port.
For information concerning the use of this equipment, please see the Radio
handbook.
First-aid kit, warn extinguisher
Warning triangle
Fig. 121 USB connec- tion* in central armrest compartment
Seats and stowage 147
Safety Fir Technical Data
ment
curely stowed.
ing points to ensure the vehicle handles
evenly as possible.
far forward in the luggage compartment
uggage compartment with suitable straps
.
r loose items in the vehicle can cause serious
age compartment can suddenly move and handles.
res or accidents, loose objects in the be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
he luggage compartment and secure with suit- ly important for heavy objects.
vy objects, always keep in mind that a change lso cause changes in vehicle handling.
ion on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
altea ingles.book Seite 147 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The warning triangle* is located in a stowage box under the luggage compart-
ment cover page 146, fig. 122. To open this storage compartment, turn the
knob 90 fig. page 146, fig. 123.
Note The warning triangle is not part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher
The first-aid kit* is located in a stowage box on the left side of the luggage
compartment.
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the luggage compartment carpet by
velcro.
Note The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's
standard equipment.
The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements.
Observe the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit. You should
purchase a new first-aid kit as soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
first-aid kit has expired.
The fire extinguisher must comply with legal requirements.
Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
should, therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
will inform you of the next date for checking.
Before acquiring accessories and emergency equipment see the instruc-
tions in Accessories and spares page 207.
Luggage compart
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be se
Please observe the follow
well at all times:
Distribute the load as
Place heavy objects as
as possible.
Secure luggage in the l
on the fastening rings
WARNING
Loose luggage and othe injuries.
Loose objects in the lugg change the way the vehicle
During sudden manoeuv passenger compartment can
Always store objects in t able straps. This is especial
When you transport hea in the centre of gravity can a
Please observe informat
Seats and stowage148
fig. 124 from the retaining pins .
ts slot, in its rest position and pull
compartment should remain closed.
partment
artment by turning the knob 90
ompartment is freed from the pivot point
jects on the luggage compartment cover, this upants in case of sudden braking.
Fig. 125 Removing storage shelf
AB AA
altea ingles.book Seite 148 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Caution Hard objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating
element in the rear window and cause damage.
Note The ventilation slots in front of the rear side windows must not be covered as
this would prevent stale air being extracted from the vehicle.
Rear shelf
Removing the cover
Disengage the loops
Extract the cover from i
outwards. The storage
To remove the storage com
Open the storage comp
page 146, fig. 123.
Pull outwards until the c
fig. 125.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard ob will endanger the vehicle occ
Fig. 124 Luggage compartment cover
Seats and stowage 149
Safety Fir Technical Data
e maximum load permitted for the entire roof
) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should the
exceeded. See the chapter on Technical Data.
or large objects on the roof, any change in the
e to a change in the centre of gravity or an
st be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
must be used.
ith a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
ier system when opened.
altea ingles.book Seite 149 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Caution Before closing the tailgate, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is
correctly fitted.
An overloaded boot could mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly
seated and it may be bent or damaged.
If the boot is overloaded, remove the tray.
Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment
cover, rear visibility is not reduced.
Only the warning triangle* and other lightweight objects should be stored
in the storage compartment.
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may lead to paintwork damage
or marks on the bodywork.
Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly over
the entire length. However, th
(including the support system
total weight of the vehicle be
When transporting heavy
normal vehicle behaviour du
increased wind resistance mu
able speed and driving style
For those vehicles fitted w
with the load on the roof carr
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning150
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
e has reached its operating temperature.
ed off automatically approximately 20 minutes
also be switched off beforehand by pushing
vents strong odours in the outside air from
r example when passing through a tunnel or in
. 126 On the dash panel: Heater controls
altea ingles.book Seite 150 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating and ventilation
Controls and equipment
Using the controls fig. 126 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engin
Rear window heating
This function will be switch
after being switched on. It can
the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode pre
entering the vehicle interior, fo
queuing traffic .
Fig
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 151
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 151 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
Air distribution towards the windscreen. Air recirculation is, for safety
reasons, not possible in this position.
Air distribution to the upper body.
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
In air recirculation mode, no ambient air enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, you should never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for longer periods, as this increases the risk of an accident.
Note Please observe the general notes page 159.
A4
A5
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning152
heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
0 minutes after switching on. It can also be
by pushing the button.
tion mode page 154
page 153
our speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
e lowest speed when driving slowly.
ust be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. od visibility. Please familiarise yourself with eating and ventilation system, including the
r the windscreens.
. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea ingles.book Seite 152 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
Using the controls fig. 127 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector page 153
Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
page 153
Button Rear window
matically approximately 2
switched off beforehand
Button Air recircula
Air distribution control Blower switch. There are f
should always be set at th
WARNING
For road safety all windows m This is essential to ensure go the correct operation of the h anti-fog/defrost functions fo
Fig
A1 A5 A6
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3
A4
A5
A6
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 153
Safety Fir Technical Data
mpartment
itioning using the button page 152,
elector anti-clockwise until the desired
ed.
to one of the settings 1-4.
g. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea ingles.book Seite 153 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note Please observe the general notes page 159.
Heating and cooling the interior
Heating of the vehicle interior
Turn the temperature selector fig. 128 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the foot rest) and (towards the windscreen and
foot rest areas).
Cooling the passenger co
Switch on the air cond
fig. 127 .
Turn the temperature s
cooling output is reach
Turn the blower switch
Fi
A1
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning154
nts and prevents misting of the windows when
gh.
cannot be switched on this may be caused by
ning.
.
re is lower than +3C.
m compressor has been temporarily switched
t temperature is too high.
s faulty.
e. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea ingles.book Seite 154 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupa
the ambient air humidity is hi
If the air conditioning system
the following reasons:
The engine may not be run
The blower is switched off
The ambient air temperatu
The air conditioning syste
off because the engine coolan
The air conditioning fuse i
Another fault in the vehicl
ified workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from entering the vehicle.
Fig
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155
Safety Fir Technical Data
culation is not possible when the control for air
screen setting .
ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the itched off, the windows can quickly mist over.
leave the air recirculation mode switched on creases the risk of an accident.
g. 130 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
altea ingles.book Seite 155 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Air recirculation mode page 154, fig. 129 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the cold air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
For reasons of safety, air recir
distribution is set to the wind
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no air conditioning system is sw Therefore, you should never for longer periods, as this in
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
Fi
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156
7
e 2C-Climatronic on and off page 157
c temperature, ventilation and air distribution
heating, ventilation and air-conditioning
the right side page 156
ust be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. od visibility. Please familiarise yourself with eating and ventilation system, including the
r the windscreens.
tes page 159.
mperature, air flow and distribution
ted so that a specified temperature is
ossible and then maintained.
justed separately for the left and right
r.
ode
page 155, fig. 130. AUTO is shown
altea ingles.book Seite 156 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
The air conditioning system only works when the engine is running
and the blower is switched on.
Press the temperature control buttons page 155, fig. 130
or in order to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or
the right hand side respectively.
The functions will be switched on when the buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated in the
display. Also, the de-icing and rear heated window functions will
turn on along with their corresponding yellow symbol. Press the
button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior.
Display of the selected interior temperature for the left side.
Button Manual air recirculation mode.
Button Central air distribution
Button Downward air distribution
Button Upward air distribution
Display of the selected interior temperature for the right side.
Button defrost function for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen. The air recirculation
mode, if switched on, will be switched off as soon as the defrost function
is switched on. At temperatures over 3C, the air conditioning system will
be switched on automatically and the blower speed will be increased by
one level in order to dry the air. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Temperature selector for the left side page 156
Blower control page 15
Button Switches th
Button Automati
control page 156
Button Switches
system off
Temperature selector for
WARNING
For road safety all windows m This is essential to ensure go the correct operation of the h anti-fog/defrost functions fo
Note Please observe the general no
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air te
are automatically regula
attained as quickly as p
The temperature can be ad
sides of the vehicle interio
Switching on automatic m
Press the button
on the display.
A9
A14
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11 OFF
A12 AUTO
A13 ECON
A14
AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157
Safety Fir Technical Data
tant temperature level fully automatically. The
ed to the interior, the blower speed and the air
omatically. The system also allows for the effect
no need for manual adjustment. Therefore,
best comfort for the vehicle occupants in virtu-
t the year.
off whenever an adjustment is made using the
n, air flow or . The temperature will
in the parameters manually selected by the
.
air flow control . The symbol will
play.
ECON
g. 131 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
A10 AUTO
altea ingles.book Seite 157 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Press the temperature selectors to set the desired temperatures
for the left and right sides of the interior. We recommend 22C
(72F).
A comfortable interior climate is quickly reached when a temperature of
+22C (72F) is set in automatic mode. It can be changed as necessary to suit
individual preferences or particular circumstances. It is possible to select
interior temperatures from +16C (61F) to +29.5C (86F). These are approx-
imate temperatures and the actual temperature may be slightly higher or
lower depending on the ambient conditions.
Climatronic maintains a cons
temperature of the air suppli
distribution are regulated aut
of strong sunlight, so there is
automatic mode provides the
ally all conditions throughou
Automatic mode is switched
buttons for the air distributio
continue to be regulated with
user.
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required
Switching on manual mode
To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 131 to
, or press the
disappear from the dis
Fi
A3
A5 ECON
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158
revents fumes or unpleasant smells
e.
page 157, fig. 131 to switch air recir-
. It is switched on if the following symbol
.
ts strong odours in the ambient air from
r example when passing through a tunnel or in
e, the air recirculation increases the effective-
heating the air inside the passenger compart-
outside.
es, the air recirculation increases the effective-
stem by cooling the air inside the passenger
ambient air.
ulation is not possible when the control for air
screen setting .
ambient air enters the vehicle interior. If the itched off, the windows can quickly mist over. leave the air recirculation mode switched on creases the risk of an accident.
A2
altea ingles.book Seite 158 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector. It
is possible to select interior temperatures from +16C (61F) to +29.5C
(86F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 16C (61F) is selected, the display switches to LO. In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 29.5C (86F) is selected the display switches to HI. In
this setting the system runs at maximum heating output and the temperature
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted freely using the control . Always have the
blower running at a low setting to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
vehicle. Pushing the button to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted using the buttons , and . It is also
possible to open and close some of the air vents separately.
Switching the air conditioning system on and off
Pressing the button switches off the air conditioning system to save
fuel. The temperature continues to be regulated. The set temperature can
then only be reached if it is higher than the ambient temperature.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode p
from entering the vehicl
Press the button culation mode on or off
appears in the display
Air recirculation mode preven
entering the vehicle interior, fo
queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outsid
ness of the heating system by
ment rather than the air from
With high ambient temperatur
ness of the air conditioning sy
compartment rather than the
For reasons of safety, air recirc
distribution is set to the wind
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no air conditioning system is sw Therefore, you should never for longer periods, as this in
A10
ECON
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159
Safety Fir Technical Data
m operates most effectively with the windows
losed. However, if the sun has heated up the
cooled more quickly by opening the windows for
circulation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
s a residue on the evaporator, producing a
.
the air conditioning at least once a month, to
and prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
orised Service Centre should be consulted to
altea ingles.book Seite 159 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
General notes
The pollen filter
The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and active carbon filter)
serves as a barrier against impurities in the ambient air, including dust and
pollen.
For the air conditioning system to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
filter must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high
levels of air pollution, the pollen filter must be changed more frequently than
stated in the Service Schedule.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch off the air
conditioning with button to prevent further damage and have it
checked by a qualified workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend that you take the vehicle to a quali-
fied workshop should problems occur.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool under-
neath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to suspect
a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the
windows misting over.
The air from the vents flows through the passenger compartment and is
extracted by slots designed for this purpose. Do not cover these slots with
articles of clothing or other objects.
The air conditioning syste
and the sliding/tilting roof* c
vehicle, the air inside can be
a short period.
Do not smoke while air re
air conditioning system leave
permanent unpleasant odour
It is advisable to connect
lubricate the system gaskets
capacity is detected, an Auth
check the system.
ECON
Driving160
the correct position.
e steering column fig. 132 down
el in this way until the correct position is
again firmly .
ing column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.
eering column should be adjusted only when k of accident.
Fig. 133 Proper sitting position for driver
altea ingles.book Seite 160 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat to
Push the lever under th
.
Adjust the steering whe
set fig. 133.
Then push the lever up
WARNING
Incorrect use of the steer rect seating position can res
To avoid accidents, the st the vehicle is stationary. Ris
Fig. 132 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Driving 161
Safety Fir Technical Data
programme (ESP)*
safer in certain situations.
rogram (ESP) contains the electronic differential
ntrol system (TCS). The ESP function works in
th warning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
ally when the engine is started.
ere you require less traction, you can switch off
fig. 134 .
hains,
w or on loose surfaces,
Fig. 134 Detail of the centre console: ESP button
altea ingles.book Seite 161 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your breast bone page 160, fig. 133. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you decide if special specific modifica- tions are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation
ESP helps make driving
The Electronic Stabilisation P
lock (EDL) and the traction co
conjunction with the ABS. Bo
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatic
In specific circumstances wh
the ESP by pressing button
For example:
When driving with snow c
when driving in deep sno
WARNING (continued)
Driving162
key
lock
ignition and the engine are OFF and the
te without the ignition key, turn the steering
dible sound. You should always lock the
your vehicle. This will help prevent theft of the
low plug system
sition and let go of the key. If the key cannot be
m position to position , move the
d off the steering lock mechanism) until the key
Fig. 135 Ignition key positions
A0
A1
A0 A12
altea ingles.book Seite 162 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
You should press the button to switch the ESP back on when you no longer
need wheel spin.
The TCS and EDL are also switched off if the ESP is switched off. That is to say,
these systems are not available while ESP is not activated.
When does the button light up or flash?
It lights up when the ignition is switched on and should go out again after
about 2 seconds.
It will start flashing to indicate that ESP is counteracting an unstable
driving condition.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
It will light up continuously if the ESP is switched off.
WARNING
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 179, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition
Ignition switched off, steering
In the position fig. 135 the
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to opera
wheel until it locks with an au
steering wheel when you leave
vehicle .
Switching on the ignition or g
Turn the ignition key to this po
turned or is difficult to turn fro
steering wheel (to take the loa
turns freely.
Driving 163
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts unauthorised persons from driving
hat deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
erted into the ignition.
ted again automatically as soon as you pull the
d using a genuine SEAT key with the correct
ed properly if you do not have a genuine SEAT
ping the engine
started using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
old it in this position, the starter will then
ngine.
position page 162 to start the engine.
altea ingles.book Seite 163 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Each time that the vehicle must be started, the ignition key must be turned to
the position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the ignition key from the lock. The steering lock could be activated immediately - Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short period. This is especially important if you must leave children or disabled people in the vehicle, they could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the windows possibly resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could result in the engine being started or electrical systems, such as the electric windows, being used. This can result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser preven
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip t
matically when the key is ins
The immobiliser will be activa
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be starte
code.
Note The vehicle cannot be operat
key.
Starting and stop
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be
the correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal fully and h
only have to turn the e
Turn the ignition key to
A2
A0
A2
Driving164
vironment running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
s you start the engine. This helps the engine
aster and reduces emissions.
tarted using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
old it in this position, the starter will then
gine.
the starting position.
position page 162, fig. 135 . The
light for engine pre-heating.
goes out, turn the key to position to
t press the accelerator.
y as soon as the engine starts, the starter
wed to run on with the engine.
ngine may be a little noisy for the first few
built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
the engine, see page 263.
A1
A2
altea ingles.book Seite 164 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts; the starter
motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine.
After starting a very hot engine, you may need to press the accelerator briefly.
When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for the first few
seconds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about
10 seconds and try again after about half a minute. If the engine still does not
start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 247, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions page 263, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the en Do not warm-up the engine by
You should drive off as soon a
reach operating temperature f
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be s
the correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal fully and h
only have to turn the en
Turn the ignition key to
Turn the ignition key to
indication lamp will
When the warning lamp
start the engine. Do no
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not be allo
When starting from cold, the e
seconds until oil pressure has
This is quite normal, and no c
If there are problems starting
Driving 165
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment y running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
as you start the engine. This helps the engine
faster and reduces emissions.
e
position page 162, fig. 135 .
ff the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
s switched off. It is also possible that it will turn
perature of the coolant increases due to the
the engine compartment or if this is heated due
heat of the sun.
ine until the vehicle is stationary.
nly when the engine is running. You will need ehicle when the engine is switched off. As you anner, there is a greater risk of accidents and
gage immediately when the key is removed ehicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
A0
altea ingles.book Seite 165 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Glow plug system for the diesel engine
To avoid unnecessary load on the battery, do not use any other major elec-
trical equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.
Start the engine as soon as the glow plug warning lamp page 81 goes out.
Starting the engine after the fuel tank has been completely run dry
If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it may take longer than normal
(up to one minute) to start the engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
because the system must eliminate air first.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed for more than approximately
50 metres to start the engine. Fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle to start it, you should first
try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow the instruc-
tions page 263, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the e Do not warm-up the engine b
You should drive off as soon
reach operating temperature
Switching off the engin
Stopping the engine.
Turn the ignition key to
After the engine is switched o
minutes, even if the ignition i
itself on once more if the tem
elimination of built up heat in
to prolonged exposure to the
WARNING
Never switch off the eng
The brake servo works o more strength to brake the v cannot brake in the normal m serious injury.
The steering lock can en from the ignition lock. The v
Driving166
tationary with the engine idling. Press the
o neutral gate and push the lever all the
e left, and then into the reverse position
.
ngaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
engaging this gear wait about 6 seconds with
rder to protect the gearbox.
when the reverse gear is selected and the igni-
Fig. 137 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox
altea ingles.book Seite 166 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Caution If the engine has been driven hard for a long period, the engine could over-
heat when it is switched off. Risk of engine damage. For this reason, you
should idle the engine for approx. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Selecting the reverse gear
The vehicle should be s
clutch right down.
Place the gear lever int
way down.
Slide the gearstick to th
shown on the gearstick
The reverse gear can only be e
the engine is running, before
the clutch pressed in fully in o
The reversing lights come on
tion is on.
Fig. 136 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox
Driving 167
Safety Fir Technical Data
x* / DSG automatic gearbox
s
ated on the cover
cked).
cked). This position is similar to the neutral
boxes).
driving programme).
(this programme is similar to the operation of
Fig. 138 Central console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG
altea ingles.book Seite 167 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released.
Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci- dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure of your
hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid
unnecessary wear and damage.
Do not hold the car on the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear
and damage to the clutch.
Automatic gearbo
Selector lever position
Selector lever positions indic
P Parking position (lever lo
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever lo
position for manual gear
D Drive position (economic
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position
a manual gearbox).
Driving168
his programme is not recommended for use on
me (tiptronic)
g similar to a manual gearbox.
rom the gear stick or from the paddles on the
xists page 171.
revents gears from being engaged
uld cause the vehicle to move.
er lock
Fig. 140 Deactivating the lock
altea ingles.book Seite 168 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox has three
programmes.
Selecting the economy programme
This programme selects a higher gear earlier rather than remain
in a lower gear.
Put the selector lever into position D to drive forwards
Put the selector lever into position R to reverse. This position is
shared by all programmes for reversing.
Selecting the sport programme
Move the lever to position S.
If you select the sport programme, S, the program is designed for a sports
mode, that is, a programme which changes up at higher engine speeds to use
the full power of the engine. T
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual program
This programme allows drivin
You can access this program f
steering wheel, if this option e
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock p
inadvertently, which wo
Releasing the selector lev
Start the vehicle.
Fig. 139 Program selec- tion
Driving 169
Safety Fir Technical Data
t brake.
the selector lever knob (on the left,
g (R, D or S).
d wait a few seconds for the gear to
ll be felt.
accelerate.
nary with the brake pressed down (for
s). The selector lever does not need to be
P or N for this.
erator.
d hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
irmly.
the selector lever knob, move the lever to
ase the button.
r to the position D and press to the right to
onic mode.
wards (-) to select a lower gear.
altea ingles.book Seite 169 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Press and release the brake pedal, at the same time press the
button on the selector lever.
The lock is only activated when the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
than 5 km/h. At higher speeds, the lock is automatically released in position
N.
For rapid changes of position (e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
lever remains in the position N more than one second then it is locked. With
the automatic lock, the lever is prevented passing from P and N to any other
gear without first pressing the brake pedal.
The selector lever must be put in the position P in order to remove the key.
Driving with an automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox
The drive and reverse gears are automatically engaged.
Driving
Press and hold the foo
Press on the button on
fig. 141).
Select a gear for drivin
Release the button an
engage, a light jerk wi
Release the brake and
Short stop
Hold the vehicle statio
example at traffic light
put into the positions
Do not press the accel
Parking the vehicle
Press the foot brake an
Apply the handbrake f
Press in the button on
the position P and rele
Driving slowly
Move the selector leve
put the lever into Tiptr
Press the gear lever toFig. 141 Driving
Driving170
, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake
e held for a long period of time, not even ill cause overheating of the brakes and a aking power and a significant increase in
coast down a gradient with the selector lever n the engine is not running. For descents, the me is recommended to keep the speed
earbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
ss the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
ay be damaged because it will not be
altea ingles.book Seite 170 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Hill stop
Hold the vehicle, in all cases, using the foot brake to prevent
rolling back.
Do not try to slow the vehicle using another forward gear (engine
braking).
Descending gradients
With the gear engaged, release the brake and accelerate.
The steeper the gradient the lower the gear must be for effective engine
braking. For example, if 3rd gear is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
braking is insufficient and vehicle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
not become excessive, the gearbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
3rd gear.
WARNING
The driver should never leave the vehicle while the engine is running or with any gear selected. If for any reason you must leave the vehicle with the engine running, apply the handbrake and move the selector lever to posi- tion P.
When the engine is running and the positions D, S or R are selected, it is necessary to hold the vehicle with the foot brake because the vehicle will creep at a low speed.
Never accelerate while changing the position of the selector lever (risk of an accident).
The selector lever must never be moved into the positions R or P while moving (risk of an accident).
Before descending a steep gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic programme to select a lower gear.
If you must stop on a hill to avoid rolling back.
The footbrake must not b lightly; continuous braking w reduction or even a loss of br braking distances.
Never allow the vehicle to in positions N or D, even whe use of the Tiptronic program reduced.
Caution Never use the automatic g
even for short periods, as this
Apply the handbrake or depre
If the vehicle is allowed to
position N then the gearbox m
lubricated.
WARNING (continued)
Driving 171
Safety Fir Technical Data
t driving in Tiptronic mode
ear stick
n D and push to the right to enter the
42.
rwards (+) to select a higher gear.
ck (-) to select a lower gear.
teering wheel levers
rds the steering wheel to change up
s the steering wheel to change down
ng wheel, you can access manual driving mode
e pre-selected.
riving in Tiptronic mode
atic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a
eaches the maximum permitted revolutions.
e automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
int is reached where the engine could no longer
hilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
x is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the
in 3rd gear.
altea ingles.book Seite 171 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Using the Tiptronic gear system
The Tiptronic system allows the driver to manually select
gears
General information abou
Changing gear with the g
Put the lever in positio
Tiptronic gate fig. 1
Press the gear lever fo
Press the gear lever ba
Changing gear with the s
Pull right lever (+) towa
fig. 143.
Pull left lever (-) toward
fig. 143.
Using the levers on the steeri
regardless of the driving mod
General information about d
When accelerating, the autom
higher gear a little before it r
If a lower gear is selected, th
not change down until the po
overrev.
If the Tiptronic is selected w
gearbox / direct shift gearbo
Tiptronic will then also be
Fig. 142 Changing gear with Tiptronic
Fig. 143 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox
Driving172
r up firmly fig. 144.
y and press the locking knob in the direc-
144 and guide the handbrake lever down
irmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
lights up when the handbrake is applied
The warning lamp goes out when the hand-
with the handbrake on, the following
strument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,
to slow down the vehicle when it is in motion. iderably longer, as braking is only applied to ent!
sed this will cause overheating of the rear function of the brake system and could lead es premature wear on the rear brake
efore you leave the vehicle. The first gear
altea ingles.book Seite 172 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note The gearbox controls on the steering wheel can operate with the gear stick
in any position and with the vehicle in motion.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake leve
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slightl
tion of the arrow fig.
fully .
Always apply the handbrake f
brake applied .
The handbrake warning lamp
and the ignition switched on.
brake is released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
message* will appear in the in
an audible warning is given.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake The braking distance is cons the rear wheels. Risk of accid
If it is only partially relea brakes, which can impair the to an accident. This also caus pads/linings.
Caution Always apply the handbrake b
should also be selected.
Fig. 144 Handbrake between the front seats
Driving 173
Safety Fir Technical Data
t exhaust system could ignite inflammable , low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
pants to remain in the vehicle when it is le to open the vehicle from the inside, and vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an
ll delay assistance to occupants.
upervised in the vehicle. They could set the le, by releasing the handbrake or the gear
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.
aid system*
will use an acoustic signal to warn of
ject towards the rear of the vehicle.
em will measure the distance between the rear
le obstacle using four ultrasonic sensors located
suring range of the sensors starts at approxi- nature of the obstacle at a distance of:
.8 m
r: 1.5 m
altea ingles.book Seite 173 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
Apply the handbrake.
The first gear should also be selected.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle would roll against the kerb if it did
start to roll.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point
towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away
from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
selecting first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the ho materials, such as dry grass
Never allow vehicle occu locked. They would be unab could become trapped in the emergency, locked doors wi
Never leave children uns vehicle in motion, for examp lever / selector lever.
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can
Acoustic parking
Rear parking aid
The parking aid system
the approach of any ob
Description
The acoustic parking aid syst
of the vehicle and any possib
on the rear bumper. The mea
mately and depending on the
side of the rear bumper: 0
middle of the rear bumpe
WARNING (continued)
Driving174
children and animals because the system will ys pay attention when reversing to avoid acci-
eplacement for driver awareness. The driver for parking and other manoeuvres.
cles detected by the system may no longer be
e car moves closer, so the system will not give
inds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
, high kerbs or painted railings etc) may not
tem, so there is a risk of damaging the vehicle
ith uniform edges and bumps may not be
ystem due to their geometry. Take special care
ch as corners, rectangular objects, etc.., these
cle.
n manoeuvring into a corner between two
e approach of the wall to the side of the vehicle
es not replace use of the mirrors for manoeu-
(hammers, tyres, construction machinery,
interfere with the operation of the system.
nsors, take care not to damage or scratch them.
sure washers or steam cleaners, the sensors
ery short period and from a distance of more
altea ingles.book Seite 174 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Activation
The system is activated by engagement of the reverse gear. A brief acoustic
signal confirms the activation and correct function of the system.
Reversing
The distance warning will begin as soon as an obstacle is detected by the
system. The frequency of the bleeps emitted by the system will increase
rapidly as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
Within a short distance of about 25 cm, a continuous signal sounds (stop
signal). The driver should not reverse any further.
Trailer towing
For vehicles fitted with a tow bar by the manufacturer, the parking aid system
will not be activated by the engagement of the reverse gear when pulling a
trailer, as the trailer's electric connecter will be plugged into the vehicle.
Possible faults
If a continuous bleep sounds for some seconds when the reverse gear is
engaged, this indicates that there is a fault in the parking aid system.
If the fault continues until the ignition is turned off, the acoustic signal
warning of the fault will not be emitted every time the system is reactivated
(by engaging the reverse gear). Thus, the system ready indication will not
sound either. Have the fault repaired by an Authorised Service Centre as soon
as possible.
If there is no ready signal or no acoustic warning signal then the parking aid
loudspeaker is faulty and may not warn of obstacles.
To ensure that the system works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and
free of ice and snow.
WARNING
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles may not be detected.
Always look out for small not always detect them. Alwa dents.
The parking aid is not a r must take full responsibility
Caution Please note that low obsta
registered by the sensors as th
any further warning. Certain k
thin posts or trailer draw bars
always be detected by the sys
in such cases.
In some cases, obstacles w
detected immediately by the s
around this type of obstacle su
can cause damage to the vehi
Be especially carefully whe
perpendicular walls. Survey th
(using the mirrors)
The parking aid system do
vres.
Distant ultra-sonic sources
other vehicles with PDC) may
Periodic cleaning of the se
When cleaning with high pres
should be sprayed for only a v
than 10 cm.
WARNING (continued)
Driving 175
Safety Fir Technical Data
ntrol system on and off
145 to the left to ON.
to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
stationary.
and a speed is programmed, the indicator on )
switched off, the symbol is switched off. The
off fully when the 1st gear is selected.*
ion
Fig. 145 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
AB
altea ingles.book Seite 175 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Cruise control system (CCS)*
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.
For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads conditions are poor (e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci- dent.
Always switch off the CCS when you have finished using it. This will prevent you using it by mistake.
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when descending gradi-
ents. The vehicle will accelerate under its own weight. Use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise co
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig.
Switching off system
Either push the switch
off when the vehicle is
When the cruise control is on
the instrument panel is lit.18
If the cruise control system is
system will also be switched
18) Depending on the model vers
Driving176
d without touching the accelerator or
S/+ of the rocker switch fig. 147 to
vehicle will continue to accelerate for as
cker switch pressed. When you release
ed is stored.
T/ of the rocker switch to reduce the
automatically reduce its speed for as long
ressed. When you release the switch, the
Fig. 147 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AA
altea ingles.book Seite 176 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Setting speed*
Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker switch fig. 146
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altere
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RE increase the speed. The
long as you keep the ro
the switch, the new spe
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SE speed. The vehicle will
as you keep the switch p
new speed is stored.
Fig. 146 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
Driving 177
Safety Fir Technical Data
essed,
d to over 180 km/h,
ed to the position CANCEL without reaching
CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is
itial position.
release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
0 km/h and press once on the upper part of the
48 .
speed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
ontrol system*
AA
Fig. 149 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
altea ingles.book Seite 177 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch RES/+ page 176, fig. 147 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
if the brake pedal is depressed,
if the clutch pedal is depr
if the vehicle is accelerate
when the lever is mov
the OFF position. Once the
released and returns to its in
To resume the cruise control,
vehicle speed to less than 18
rocker switch RES/+ fig. 1
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set traffic or weather conditions
Turning off the cruise c
AA
Fig. 148 Turn signal and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
Driving178
altea ingles.book Seite 178 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one
of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
ignition turned off.
AB
Intelligent technology 179
Safety Fir Technical Data
venes here, if you press the brake pedal very
m registers an emergency situation. It then very
ke pressure so that the ABS can be activated
thus reducing the braking distance.
n the brake pedal. The brake assist system
soon as you release the brake.
gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is r speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. atures tempt you into taking any risks when
altea ingles.book Seite 179 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Tips and Maintenance
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
If the brake servo is not functioning, for example if the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake assist system (BAS)*
In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, but not with maximum force.
This results in unnecessarily long braking distances.
The brake assist system inter
quickly, the brake assist syste
quickly builds up the full bra
more quickly and efficiently,
Do not reduce the pressure o
switches off automatically as
WARNING
The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.
The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve essential that you adjust you Do not let the extra safety fe driving.
Intelligent technology180
is also determined by the tyres fitted
es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
(TCS)
em prevents the drive wheels from
s accelerating.
he traction control system during acceleration
help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
during acceleration. The system works in the
tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
ut of action.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
tically when the engine is started. If necessary,
hing the button on the centre console.
ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
it be disconnected for example
pare wheel.
ns.
or on loose surfaces
d-down, to free it by rocking.
altea ingles.book Seite 180 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under braking), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
The effectiveness of ABS page 229.
If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.
Traction control system
The traction control syst
spinning when the car i
Description and operation of t (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to
drive vehicles losing traction
entire speed range in conjunc
the ABS, the TCS will also be o
TCS helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The TCS is switched on automa
it may be turned on or off pus
When the TCS is off, the warni
switched on at all times. Only
the wheels is required, should
With compact temporary s
When using the snow chai
When driving in deep snow
When the vehicle is bogge
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 181
Safety Fir Technical Data
m (ESP)*
idding by braking the wheels individually.
wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
by the driver, and constantly compares them
the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
e car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
g the appropriate wheel.
ed wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
s to oversteer, the system will act on the front
urn.
endations
y function included in the ESP This function aids
he vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
ce with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP
helps the driver with a counter steering
teering.
the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
lf with this function, the driver has full control of
hat ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This ticularly on slippery and wet roads and when
g style to suit the condition of the roads and let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you riving, this can cause accidents.
altea ingles.book Seite 181 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
Electronic stabilisation programme (ESP)*
General notes
The electronic stabilisation programme increases the
vehicle's stability on the road.
The electronic stabilisation programme helps to reduce the danger of skid-
ding.
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and Steering manoeuvre recommendations.
Electronic Stabilising Progra
ESP reduces the danger of sk
The system uses the steering
changes of direction desired
with the actual behaviour of
maintained (for instance, if th
sates automatically by brakin
The forces acting on the brak
condition. If the vehicle tend
wheel on the outside of the t
Steering manoeuvre recomm
This is a complementary safet
the driver to better stabilize t
case of sudden braking surfa
to destabilize its trajectory to
recognizes the situation and
manoeuvre from the power s
This function simply provides
critical situations.
The vehicle doesn't steer itse
the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
It must be remembered t should be kept in mind, par towing a trailer.
Always adapt your drivin the traffic situation. Do not into taking any risks when d
Intelligent technology182
side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
and distributing more driving force to the other
al.
e braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
f.
utomatically when the brake has cooled down.
lippery surface, for example on ice and snow, y. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to hicle's stability.
style to suit road conditions and the traffic safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking an cause accidents.
.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
tem (TCS)
vents the drive wheels from spinning when the
0.
altea ingles.book Seite 182 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP and TCS.
Note To disconnect using the ESP button page 161.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking during braking
page 180.
Electronic differential lock (EDL)*
The electronic differential lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
tion caused if one of the driven wheels starts spinning.
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
pery conditions where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
The system will control the revolutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
sensors (in case of an EDL fault the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
page 78.
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
ences in the speed of the driven wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
a slippery road surface on one
wheel which has lost traction
driven wheel via the differenti
To prevent the disc brake of th
out automatically if subjected
function normally without EDL
the EDL has been switched of
The EDL will switch on again a
WARNING
When accelerating on a s press the accelerator carefull spin. This could impair the ve
Always adapt your driving situation. Do not let the extra any risks when driving, this c
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e
gear or any components affec
ciency of the EDL.
The traction control sys
The traction control system pre
car is accelerating page 18
Intelligent technology 183
Safety Fir Technical Data
uently, or if corrosion has formed on the discs,
pads and discs by braking firmly a few times
d .
ld ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-
fault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be
re on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-
brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
ored electronically.
pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
the engine is running.
es to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, ure not to inconvenience or endanger other
.
not move while in neutral, when the motor is uld result in an accident.
by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do
s overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ear.
g, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
r move the selector lever to a lower gear position
smission). This makes use of engine braking
altea ingles.book Seite 183 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km,
they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads; road salt
When the velocity is over 80 km/h, and the windscreen wipers are on, the
brake system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs - without warning to the driver - in regular intervals and requires a
more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving
through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter
by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing
the pedal to restore full braking effect.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is
driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
has to wear off before braking.
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for dirt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion
to form on the discs if the car is used infrequently, or if you only drive low
mileages without using the brakes very much.
If the brakes are not used freq
it is advisable to clean off the
from a moderately high spee
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel shou
one of the two brake circuits h
ified workshop and have the
prepared to use more pressu
ping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the
The brake fluid level is monit
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the
brake servo works only when
WARNING
When applying the brak select a clear, dry road. Be s road users. Risk of accident
Ensure the vehicle does stopped. Failure to do so co
Caution Never let the brakes drag
not really intend to brake. Thi
ping distances and greater w
Before driving down a lon
and change to a lower gear (o
if your car has automatic tran
Intelligent technology184
run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.
, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.
brakes are excessively used they will over ong steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce ear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear
transmission). This makes use of engine es.
by applying light pressure. Continuous to overheat and will increase the braking ase the brakes alternately.
t with the engine switched off. The braking rably as the brake servo does not function.
kes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid ng. This impairs the braking effect.
front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the erheat. Observe the relevant instructions s page 207, Modifications.
braking distance will be increased consider- kshop immediately and avoid unnecessary
altea ingles.book Seite 184 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Braking effect and braking distance
The braking effect and braking distance are influenced by
driving situations and road conditions.
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under
which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
drive in town, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recom-
mend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by an Approved
Service Centre more frequently than recommended in the Maintenance
Programme.
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in
heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less-
ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): The brakes should
be dried by pressing the pedal to restore full braking effect.
WARNING
Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.
New brake pads must be during the first 200 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad
If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin
On steep descents if the heat. Before driving down a l speed and change to a lower g if your vehicle has automatic braking and relieves the brak
Never let the brakes rub braking will cause the brakes distance. Apply and then rele
Never let the vehicle coas distance is increased conside
Very heavy use of the bra is left in the system for too lo
Non-standard or damaged brakes and cause them to ov before purchasing accessorie
If a brake circuit fails, the ably. Contact a qualified wor journeys.
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 185
Safety Fir Technical Data
es a special hydraulic fluid. The container is
rtment (front left). The correct fluid level in the
power steering to function properly. The
d at the Inspection Service.
altea ingles.book Seite 185 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Power steering (servotronic*)
The power steering assists the driver when turning the
steering wheel (with the engine running).
The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
If a fault should occur in the servotronic system the power steering* will still
operate. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to
different speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly,
this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for
instance when parking) more effort will be required than usual. The fault
should be corrected by a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
The power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering
wheel is very hard to turn.
If the steering is held at its turning limit when the car is stationary, this will
place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the steering
wheel to its limits places a load on the system, which causes noise. It will also
reduce the idling speed of the engine.
Caution When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limits for
more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power
steering.
Note If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off
(for instance when being towed), the car can still be steered. However, more
effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.
If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-
fied workshop as soon as possible.
The power steering requir
located in the engine compa
reservoir is important for the
hydraulic fluid level is checke
Driving and the environment186
ake pads
-in carefully for the first 500 km. New
n-in carefully for the first 200 km.
an compensate for the reduced braking effect
the brake pedal. If you need to make an emer-
ce will be longer with new brake pads than with
un-in.
ximum grip to start with, and require running- nt. Drive particularly carefully in the first 500
run in and do not have the correct friction 0 km. However, the reduced braking capacity sing on the brake pedal a little harder.
cation system
of the catalytic converter
etrol.
dry.
altea ingles.book Seite 186 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than three quarters of top speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil
consumption reduced.
Running in tyres and br
New tyres should be run
brake pads should be ru
During the first 200 km, you c
by applying more pressure to
gency stop, the braking distan
brake pads which have been r
WARNING
New tyres do not give ma in. This may cause an accide km.
New brake pads must be properties during the first 20 may be compensated by pres
Exhaust gas purifi
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life
Always use unleaded p
Do not run the fuel tank
Driving and the environment 187
Safety Fir Technical Data
te filter
culate filter eliminates soot produced
liminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving
ilter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
ted by dust and pollen and the indicator for the
r indicator will light page 79.
ulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- o contact with flammable materials under- comply could result in fire.
eath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust ire.
el engine particulate filter must not be refuelled
that the fuel system may be damaged.
ing must be taken into consideration:
atalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
altea ingles.book Seite 187 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil
page 218, Topping up engine oil .
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary
page 263.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is
moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the
nearest qualified workshop. In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
up when any of the described symptoms occur page 72. If this happens,
unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the environment.
The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.
WARNING
The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with dry grass or inflammable materials under the vehicle.
Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is driven.
Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank, in this case, the irregularity of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.
For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a
smell of sulphur from the exhaust under some conditions. This depends on
the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be reme-
died by changing to another brand of fuel.
Diesel engine particula
The diesel engine parti
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter e
system. Under normal driving
conditions do not allow the f
trips) the filter will be obstruc
diesel engine particulate filte
WARNING
The diesel engine partic tures; it should not enter int neath the vehicle. Failure to
Do not apply wax undern system: this could cause a f
Caution Vehicles equipped with a dies
using biodiesel (RME), given
Driving abroad
Notes
For driving abroad, the follow
For vehicles fitted with a c
available for the journey. See
Driving and the environment188
ights for driving on the left
ght, if you are changing from driving on the
d side fig. 150.
Fig. 150 Right headlight
Fig. 151 Left headlight
altea ingles.book Seite 188 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
In some countries it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centre may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle in addition to necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for headlights
If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
lenses. Further information is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
In vehicles with self-directing headlights, the rotation system must previ-
ously be disconnected. To do this please go to a specialist workshop.
Adjusting simple headl
On the right hand side headli
right-hand side to the left-han
Driving and the environment 189
Safety Fir Technical Data
are changing from driving on the left-hand side
e changing from driving on the left-hand side to
altea ingles.book Seite 189 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
On the left hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-
hand side to the right-hand side page 188, fig. 151.
Covering simple headlights for driving on the right
On the right headlight, if you
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you ar
the right-hand side.
Fig. 152 Right headlight
Fig. 153 Left headlight
Driving and the environment190
t, if you are changing from driving on the left-
de fig. 155.
lights for driving on the right
Fig. 156 Right headlight
Fig. 157 Left headlight
altea ingles.book Seite 190 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Adjustments for Bixenon headlights for driving on the left
On the right hand side headlight, if you are changing from driving on the
right-hand side to the left-hand side fig. 154.
On the left hand side headligh
hand side to the right-hand si
Covering Bixenon head
Fig. 154 Right headlight
Fig. 155 Left headlight
Driving and the environment 191
Safety Fir Technical Data
the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
ions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
derate speeds will help to save fuel.
the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
an the amount of fuel needed to restart the
time to warm up when it is running at idling
pollutant emissions are also especially high
ase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
id running the engine at high speed.
arantees that, before beginning a journey, you
viced engine gives you the benefit of improved imum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
ean an increase of 10 % over normal fuel
you fill the tank. Oil consumption depends to a
ad and engine speed. It is quite normal that the
ine only reaches its lowest level after a certain
oil consumption can only be correctly assessed
ing on your personal driving style, oil consump-
r 1,000 km.
nd emission of polluting gases, the engine and
s should reach the optimum service tempera-
altea ingles.book Seite 191 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
On the right headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side
to the right-hand side.
On the left headlight, if you are changing from driving on the left-hand side to
the right-hand side.
Driving economically and with respect for the environment
General Observations
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres largely depend on your driving style. Fuel consumption may be
reduced from 10 to 15 % by driving carefully and economically. Below we will
give you some suggestions to "alleviate" some of the strain to the environ-
ment and, at the same time, your wallet.
Anticipate the traffic situation well in advance
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
tion, you will have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is
possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red
light ahead.
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears.
Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon
reaching 2000 rpm.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerate slowly and avoid the kick-down position.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at
consumption, exhaust emiss
higher speeds. Driving at mo
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off
crossings or at traffic lights w
30 - 40 seconds is greater th
engine.
The engine takes a very long
speed. Mechanical wear and
during this initial warm-up ph
after starting the engine. Avo
Regular maintenance
Regular maintenance work gu
will not waste fuel. A well-ser
fuel efficiency as well as max
A maladjusted engine may m
consumption.
Check the oil level every time
great extent on the engine lo
oil consumption of a new eng
mileage. This means that the
after about 5,000 km. Depend
tion can be up to 0.5 litres pe
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption a
the exhaust filtration system
ture.
Driving and the environment192
ess
top priority in the design, choice of materials
eat
cal recycling
signed for ease of dismantling
cilitate dismantling
ade materials
rs are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
an be recycled
rouped together for easy recycling
manufacture
s from plastics
onditioning
aterials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
r manufacturing plastic parts
ting the vehicles in transit
n
altea ingles.book Seite 192 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10 %.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
Save electrical energy
The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need
for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, always
turn off electrical equipment when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ment that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
heating or the seat heaters*.
Logbook
A good way of keeping a check on fuel consumption is to take regular notes.
You will be able to note the variations (both positive and negative) and react
accordingly.
Environmental friendlin
Environmental protection is a
and production of your new S
Design measures for economi
Joints and connections de
Modular construction to fa
Increased use of single-gr
Plastic parts and elastome
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used c
Similar types of plastics g
Recycled materials used in
Reduced vapour emission
CFC-free refrigerant in air c
Compliance with prohibited m mercury, chrome VI.
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material fo
Solvent-free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for protec
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in productio
Driving and the environment 193
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 193 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Water-soluble paint
Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
Overall water consumption reduced
Heat recovery systems
Trailer towing194
and draw bar weights that are given on the
et are for certification purposes only. The
model, which may be lower than these figures
en in the registration documents Section
o that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
trailer must be secured to prevent them
um permissible pressure shown on the sticker
lap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
nufacturer's recommendations.
ough of the road behind the trailer with the
the case you should have additional mirrors
ould be mounted on hinged extension
give sufficient vision to the rear.
railer. This could result in fatal accidents.
itional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
een the normal inspection intervals if the
towing a trailer.
altea ingles.book Seite 194 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
page 196.
Connector
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available from any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper gradients.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weights data plate of the towing brack
correct figures for your specific
for the towing bracket, are giv
Technical data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer s
possible. Loads carried in the
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maxim
on the inside of the fuel tank f
accordance with the trailer ma
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see en
standard mirrors. If this is not
fitted. Both exterior mirrors sh
brackets. Adjust the mirrors to
WARNING
Never transport people in a t
Note Towing a trailer places add
mend additional services betw
vehicle is used frequently for
Trailer towing 195
Safety Fir Technical Data
d trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
t to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
r wind conditions. This applies especially when
ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
stop the snaking by increasing speed.
the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
locking. Select a low gear in good time before
This enables you to use the engine braking to
during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
ys monitor the temperature indicator for the
ram*
en towing a trailer. The ESP* makes it easier to
snake.
altea ingles.book Seite 195 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle an
this reason it is advisable no
unfavourable road, weather o
driving downhill.
You should always reduce spe
sign of snaking. Never try to
Always brake in good time. If
brakes gently at first and then
caused by the trailer wheels
going down a steep descent.
slow down the vehicle.
Heating
At very high temperatures and
and high engine speed, alwa
coolant page 55.
Electronic Stabilisation Prog
Do not switch off the ESP* wh
stabilise if the trailer starts to
Trailer towing196
Fig. 158 Attachment points for towing bracket
altea ingles.book Seite 196 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Trailer towing 197
Safety Fir Technical Data
ncorrectly installed, there is serious danger of
se observe the instructions provided by the bracket.
ncorrectly installed, this could cause damage to
.
ing of a trailer bracket is not recommended due
.
altea ingles.book Seite 197 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are underneath the vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the measurement indicated when the vehicle is fully
loaded including the maximum resting weight.
Measurement for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer implies additional work for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
Observe the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be used to connect to the
vehicle's electrical system. This requires specialist knowledge and tools.
The figures in the illustration show the dimensions and attachment points
which must be observed if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
If the towing bracket is i an accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing
Caution If the electrical socket is i
the vehicle's electrical system
Note For the sports model (FR), fitt
to the design of the bumpers
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle198
in products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.
e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other c and highly flammable. There is a fire / explo-
icle, or carry out any maintenance, switch off rake firmly and remove the key from the igni-
mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
hicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of
vironment products, try to select ones which are not
should not be disposed of with ordinary house-
sal information on the package.
altea ingles.book Seite 198 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Regular care
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt
and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they
do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight)
further intensify the corrosive effect.
After the period when salt is put on the roads it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Car care products
Car care products are available from your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used up the product.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep out of children's reach. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of certa these should be used in well
Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are toxi sion risk.
Before you wash your veh the engine, apply the handb tion.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt,
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or glass on your ve
water.
For the sake of the en When purchasing car care
harmful to the environment.
Left over car care products
hold waste. Observe the dispo
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 199
Safety Fir Technical Data
h plenty of water and rinse off.
a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Start on
way down. Use only light pressure.
ove as much as possible.
hould only be used for very stubborn dirt.
anels etc. last using a different sponge or
ughly with water.
ehicle gently using a chamois leather.
ber seals and the surfaces they touch with
freezing. Apply silicone spray to the
en braking directly after washing the
the brakes by applying the brakes care-
age 184, Braking effect and braking
s be switched off before the vehicle is washed.
altea ingles.book Seite 199 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Care of the vehicle exterior
Automatic car wash tunnel
The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-
matic car wash.
The paint is so durable that the car can normally be washed without problems
in an automatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large
extent on the design of the car wash, the brushes used, the filtering of the
wash water and the type of detergents and wax solutions used, etc.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash operator.
After the car has been washed, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the
brake discs and pads will be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by
braking several times.
WARNING
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Washing the vehicle
First soften the dirt wit
Clean the vehicle with
the roof and work your
Rinse the sponge or gl
Special car shampoo s
Clean the wheels, sill p
glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry the surface of the v
If it is cold, dry the rub
a cloth to prevent them
rubber seals.
After cleaning the vehicle
If possible, avoid sudd
vehicle. You must dry
fully several times p
distance.
WARNING
The ignition must alway
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle200
high pressure cleaner
hen using a high pressure cleaner!
tructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
erning the pressure and the spraying
istance for soft materials and painted
ure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
jet nozzles or so-called dirt blasters
en braking directly after washing the
the brakes by applying the brakes care-
age 184.
oncentrated jet or cylindrical jet (rotating ng distances and short cleaning times, visible ur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk
an 60C. This could damage the car.
altea ingles.book Seite 200 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of injury.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is
dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch
the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: if the vehicle is rinsed with a
hose, do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, luggage compartment, or bonnet. Otherwise there is a risk of malfunc-
tion.
For the sake of the environment In the interests of environmental protection, the car should be washed only
in specially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water
entering the sewerage system. In some districts, washing vehicles anywhere
else may be prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a
Be particularly careful w
Always observe the ins
particularly those conc
distance.
Increase the spraying d
bumpers.
Do not use a high press
windows page 201.
Never use concentrated
.
If possible, avoid sudd
vehicle. You must dry
fully several times p
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c nozzle). Even at large sprayi and invisible damage can occ
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident.
Caution
Do not use water hotter th
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 201
Safety Fir Technical Data
intwork:
ard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
in a sandy or dusty environment.
lastic parts.
n plastic parts, clean them with special solvent- products.
ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
e liquid is accidentally spilled.
contain solvents will damage the material.
exterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
move snow from the windows and mirrors.
altea ingles.book Seite 201 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
To avoid damage to the vehicle, maintain a sufficient distance from sensi-
tive materials for example: flexible hoses, plastic, sound proofing, etc. This is
especially important for bumpers painted in the same colour as the vehicle.
The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.
Waxing the car
Regular waxing protects the paintwork.
You need to apply wax to your car if water does not form small drops and run
off the paintwork when it is clean.
Good quality hard wax is available from your Authorised Service Centre.
A good coat of wax helps to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants page 198. It is also effective in protecting against minor
scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, it is advisable to
protect the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polish can be obtained from your Author-
ised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint page 201, Waxing the car.
Caution To prevent damage to the pa
Do not use polishes and h
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents will damage p
If normal washing fails to clea
free plastic cleaning and care
Caution The use of liquid air freshe
damage the plastic parts if th
Cleaning products which
Cleaning windows and
Cleaning the windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to re
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle202
clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
emove stubborn stains.
ooked after, they will not freeze so
ve dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
product to the rubber seals.
rs, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain
are treated with a suitable care product (for
o prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
can freeze up in winter.
u should only use spray with lubricating and
h a damp cloth.
altea ingles.book Seite 202 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. Chamois leathers
which have been used on painted surfaces are not suitable for use on
windows. They will be soiled with wax deposits which would smear the
windows.
If possible use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only. Do not move it to and fro.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and
silicone deposits.
Wax deposits have to be removed with a special cleaner which is available
from your Authorised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could
cause the wiper blades to judder. A window cleanser specifically for removing
wax will stop the blades juddering if added to the windscreen washer fluid.
Grease removing cleansers will not remove wax deposits.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating elements on
the inside of the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential for clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to
a sponge or a cloth to r
Care of rubber seals
If rubber seals are well l
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to remo
2. Apply a specialist care
The weather strips on the doo
pliable and last longer if they
example silicone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will als
doors will be easier to open. If
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders yo
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wit
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 203
Safety Fir Technical Data
ust from alloy wheels.
ent to clean the wheels.
ound to the wheels.
ttention to preserve their appearance. It is
t and brake dust by washing the wheels at
he finish will be impaired.
rgent for alloy wheels.
gents should not be used. If the protective
tone impact, the damaged area should be
ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances sible and invisible damage can occur to the ident.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk d sudden braking immediately after washing the brakes by applying the brakes carefully
altea ingles.book Seite 203 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheels
Clean steel wheels regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheels should be repaired before the metal starts to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Moisture, ice and salt on the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk of accident. If possible, avoid sudden braking immediately after washing the vehicle. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 184.
Cleaning alloy wheels
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake d
Use an acid free deterg
Every three months
Apply a hard wax comp
Alloy wheels require regular a
important to remove road sal
regular intervals, otherwise t
Always use an acid-free dete
Car polish or other abrasive a
coating is damaged, e.g. by s
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vi tyres. This may cause an acc
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. If possible, avoi the vehicle. You must dry several times page 184.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle204
is usually removed if the engine compartment
g solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
ould ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
partment are given anti-corrosion treatment
ine compartment, always observe the safety
ply the parking brake firmly and always tion before you open the bonnet.
efore you clean the engine compartment.
e of vehicle, wheel arches without protecting y cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts.
t in injury.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk sudden braking immediately after washing
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
vironment could be removed when the engine is washed.
eaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
ried out only by a qualified workshop or a suit-
altea ingles.book Seite 204 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Underbody sealant
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corro-
sion and damage.
The protective coating could be damaged when driving. We recommend that
the protective coating under the body and on the running gear should be
checked, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend that repair work and additional anti-corrosion work is carried
out by your Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! This is a fire hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after the salting period.
Your Authorised Service Centre is able to provide the correct cleaning and
preserving products and has the necessary equipment. For this reason, we
recommend having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection
is cleaned with grease removin
If this job is carried out, you sh
components in the engine com
afterwards.
WARNING
When working in the eng warnings page 212.
Switch off the engine, ap remove the key from the igni
Allow the engine to cool b
Do not clean the undersid your hands and arms. You ma Failure to comply could resul
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. If possible, avoid the vehicle.
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the en Fuel, grease and oil deposits
The polluted water must be cl
engine washing should be car
able filling station.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 205
Safety Fir Technical Data
ers and fabric trim
im on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
er or with dry foam and a soft brush.
ollen cloth with water and wipe over the
be removed using a mild soap solution
tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
ak through the leather or soak into the
ft, dry cloth.
treated regularly (about twice a year) with
product, which is available from your
tre.
ery sparingly.
ft, dry cloth.
altea ingles.book Seite 205 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Care of the vehicle interior
Cleaning plastic parts and the dash panel
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and surface of the airbag module with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag inflates, disintegrating plastic parts can cause substantial injuries.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning wooden trim*
Clean the wooden trim with a clean cloth moistened with water.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cleaning cloth seat cov
Cloth seat covers and fabric tr
with a special interior cleans
Cleaning leather*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or wo
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can
(pure liquid soap; two
and a cloth.
Do not let the water so
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather care
The leather should be
a special leather-care
Authorised Service Cen
Apply these products v
Then wipe off with a so
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle206
s the belt will not retract correctly into the auto-
ning agents on the seat belts, as this can bbing. Ensure that the belts do not come into
l seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice s, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the ust be replaced by a specialist workshop.
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
s to dry completely before rolling them up.
ould become damaged.
altea ingles.book Seite 206 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the special qualities of leather, as
a natural product. Because of the natural properties of the specially selected
hides employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and
dirt, etc. so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking
after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be
protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. However, slight
colour variations in high-quality natural leather are normal.
Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Cleaning seat belts
A dirty belt may stop the seat belt working properly.
Keep the seat belts clean and check all seat belts regularly.
Cleaning seat belts
Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and leave it out.
Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow the seat belt fabric to dry.
Do not roll up the seat belt until it is dry.
If large stains form on the belt
matic belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the we contact with corrosive fluids.
Check the condition of al that the belt webbing, fitting belts is damaged, the belt m
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
Caution After cleaning, allow seat belt
Otherwise the belt retractors c
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications 207
Safety Fir Technical Data
e CE mark (European Union manufacturer
ephone holders or drink holders, should never within the working range of, the airbags. If f resulting injury if the airbag is triggered in an
ays be carried out according to our
to the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
ks, other systems may be affected by the faults.
ty, lead to excessive wear of components, and
egistration documents.
tres cannot be held liable for any damage
/or work performed incorrectly.
nd that all work should be performed by an
ing genuine and SEAT approved parts and
altea ingles.book Seite 207 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications
Accessories and parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend that you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. Authorised Service Centres have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are installed correctly
and professionally.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of parts not approved by SEAT. For this reason
SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if
these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered
by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), these must bear th
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example tel be fitted on the covers of, or they are, there is a danger o accident.
Modifications
Modifications must alw
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in networ
This can seriously impair safe
also invalidate your vehicle r
SEAT Authorised Service Cen
caused by modifications and
For this reason, we recomme
Authorised Service Centre us
accessories.
Accessories, parts replacement and modifications208
rily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.
e mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags, danger of injury if the airbag
nstructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
altea ingles.book Seite 208 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to that given in the previous instruction.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power in excess of 10 watts.
Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for
retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be fitted only by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate prima driving you could have an ac
Never attach the telephon airbag units or within the ran is triggered.
Note Please observe the operating i
radio.
Checking and refilling levels 209
Safety Fir Technical Data
, without releasing the cap in the clock-
ose the flap until it clicks into place. The
th an anti-loss attachment.
the vehicle on the right.
s operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
ver attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
r vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
otes on fuel can be found.
le and can cause serious burns and other inju-
y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the anister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
ents for the use of spare fuel canisters.
do not recommend carrying a spare fuel he canister could be damaged in an accident
tances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, g points:
el canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ild up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to
ly explosive. Always place the canister on the
altea ingles.book Seite 209 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180
to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.
Turn the key in the lock
wise direction 180.
Remove the key and cl
tank cap is secured wi
The tank flap is at the rear of
If the automatic filler nozzle i
soon as the tank is full. Ne
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for you
fuel tank flap. where further n
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammab ries.
Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel c
Follow legal requirem
For safety reasons we canister in the vehicle. T and leak.
If, in exceptional circums please observe the followin
Never fill the spare fu trostatic charge could bu ignite. This may be fatal ground to fill it.
Fig. 159 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels210
y the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
r, unit for determining the knock resistance of
ith a higher octane number than the one recom-
ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
er. If, in exceptional circumstances, the correct
Premium unleaded petrol (95 RON) the
eaded fuel with 91 RON can also be used. This
t loss of power under certain driving conditions.
Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON) the
leaded fuel with 95 RON can also be used. This
loss of power under certain driving conditions.
is not available, the engine can be run on
1 RON as an emergency measure. In this
e speeds and a light throttle. Avoid using full
petrol as soon as possible.
may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
hanol fuels available at commercial establish-
5, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
damage the fuel system.
d fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ll throttle can damage the engine when using
wer than the correct grade for the engine.
vironment el would seriously impair the efficiency of the
altea ingles.book Seite 210 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.
Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
cause damage.
For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.
Petrol
Petrol types
The correct petrol types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel
tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresponding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Standard).
Fuel types are differentiated b
= Regulation Octane Numbe
petrol). You may use petrol w
mended for your engine. How
consumption and engine pow
octane rating is not available:
For engines which require
following is valid: Regular unl
can, however, result in a sligh
For engines which require
following is valid: Premium un
can, however, result in a slight
If premium unleaded petrol
regular unleaded petrol with 9
case only use moderate engin
throttle. Fill up with premium
Caution Petrol that follows EN 228
However, the so-called bioet
ments with reference E50 or E8
may not be used, as they will
Even one tankfull of leade
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and fu
petrol with an octane rating lo
For the sake of the en Just one full tank of leaded fu
catalytic converter.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels 211
Safety Fir Technical Data
tion for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,
te.
.
viation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.
le includes the number PR 2G0 optional equip-
hicle has been prepared for biodiesel use.
re or automobile association will be able to
ain RME biodiesel fuel.
re can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
sel use.
el (biodiesel)
icle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
hicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
inter at temperatures down to approx. -10C.
elow -10C, we recommend using winter diesel
fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
esel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
iant.
oes not meet the required standard, the fuel
peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
in gas emission may occur during operation of
altea ingles.book Seite 211 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason you should use good quality petrol
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel page 209.
RME fuel*
Only those vehicles fitted with special equipment (number PR
2G0 for biodiesel use) may use biodiesel corresponding to
the standard DIN EN 14214.
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
Biodiesel is a methylester obtained from rapeseed oil.
DIN is a German abbrevia
the German standards institu
EN means European Norm
FAME is the English abbre
If the date sticker of the vehic
ment) this means that that ve
Your Authorised Service Cent
advise on where you can obt
Your Authorised Service Cent
has been prepared for biodie
Things to note about RME fu
The performance of a veh
Fuel consumption of a ve
RME fuel can be used in w
At outside temperatures b
fuel.
Caution RME fuel can damage the
adjusted.
If you decide to use biodi
which is DIN E 14,214 compl
If you use biodiesel that d
filter could become clogged.
Note In case of low exterior tem
higher than 50%, an increase
the independent heating.
Checking and refilling levels212
inners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
gine compartment
orking in the engine compartment
the engine compartment or on the
out cautiously.
n the engine or in the engine compart-
nd remove the key from the ignition.
eutral or the selector lever to position P.
ool down.
the vehicle.
ge 214.
the engine compartment unless you know
bs and have the correct tools! Have the work
shop if you are uncertain.
bles, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
y developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
Service Centres concerning modifications. For
altea ingles.book Seite 212 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
The fuel filter may become clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
this reason, we recommend that, about every 300 or 400 km, following a fuel
change, also change the fuel filter. Also note the instructions in the Inspec-
tion and Maintenance plan.
If the vehicle is to remain parked for more than about two weeks, we
recommend filling the fuel tank with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
order to avoid damage to the injection system.
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For
this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel sold generally
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (th
Working in the en
Safety instructions on w
Any work carried out in
engine must be carried
Before starting any work o
ment:
1. Switch off the engine a
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to n
4. Wait for the engine to c
5. Keep children away from
6. Raise the bonnet pa
You should not do any work in
exactly how to carry out the jo
carried out by a qualified work
All service fluids and consuma
batteries, are being constantl
information to the Authorised
Checking and refilling levels 213
Safety Fir Technical Data
ve not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths partment.
rneath the vehicle, you must use suitable ort the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of
formed when the engine is started or with the dditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
on system. You should also observe the
rical wiring of the ignition system.
loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
ie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
about pressing the accelerator if a gear is omatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could rake is applied. Danger of death.
out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- following safety notes in addition to the above
e battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when he alarm will be triggered.
d flames.
inguisher on hand.
altea ingles.book Seite 213 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
this reason we recommend that you have service fluids and consumables
replaced by an Authorised Service Centre. Please observe the relevant
instructions page 207. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
hazardous area .
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 264. The battery could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you ha and tools, in the engine com
If you have to work unde stands additionally to supp hydraulic jack is insufficient injury.
If any work has to be per engine running, there is an a rotating parts, such as the d from the high-voltage igniti following points:
Never touch the elect
Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, t clothes.
Always think carefully engaged in either an aut move, even if the handb
If work has to be carried nents, you must observe the warnings:
Always disconnect th this is done, otherwise t
Do not smoke.
Never work near nake
Always have a fire ext
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels214
ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
pull the lever under the dashboard
ion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
tion .
e release lever (arrow) and open the
y and secure it in fixture designed for this
you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping t.
Fig. 161 Arrester hook for bonnet.
altea ingles.book Seite 214 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Caution When changing or topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
in serious malfunctions and engine damage!
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet
rest position.
To release the bonnet,
fig. 160 in the direct
released by a spring ac
Lift the bonnet using th
bonnet.
Release the bonnet sta
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet if from the engine compartmen
Fig. 160 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels 215
Safety Fir Technical Data
s
st conform with exact specifications.
cial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
r except for those regions affected by extreme
is necessary for the correct operation and long
en it becomes necessary to replenish or change
t complies to the VW standards.
conforming to the VW standards then oil
I standards with an appropriate viscosity at
uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil
s on the performance of the engine for example,
consumption and a higher emission level.
fferent oils may be mixed as long as they all
.
ards) set out in the following page should
e service oil; the container will display together
trol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
altea ingles.book Seite 215 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 212.
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet slightly
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specification
The engine oil used mu
Specifications
The engine comes with a spe
used in all seasons of the yea
cold.
As the use of good quality oil
service life of the engine, wh
the oil, always use an oil tha
If it is not possible to find oil
conforming to the ACEA or AP
atmospheric temperature sho
may have some repercussion
long starting time, increased
If a top up is required then di
conform to the VW standards
The specifications (VW stand
appear on the container of th
the different standards for pe
both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels216
selected according to the diagram.
e falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
quired.
climate that is constantly very cold or very
mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
ot covered by the warranty.
00
00/ VW 506 01
01
altea ingles.book Seite 216 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is
When the ambient temperatur
period, an oil change is not re
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity19).
These oils are only useful in a
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be
caused by these additives is n
Fig. 162 Types of oil according to temperature
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504
Diesel VW 505 00/ VW 505 01/ VW 507
Diesel Injector Pump a)
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506
Diesel Injector Pump Motor 118 kWa) VW 506 01/ VW 507 00
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter (DPF)a) VW 507 00
19) Viscosity: oil density
Checking and refilling levels 217
Safety Fir Technical Data
ipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
g it in as far as it will go.
ore and check the oil level fig. 163. Top
cessary.
dicated oil level should be after the zone
ndicated oil level should be found, after, in zone
and the conditions in which the car is used, oil
5 L/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
For this reason the engine oil level must be
preferably when filling the tank and before a
engine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
ea do not start the engine. This could result
catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
AA
AA
altea ingles.book Seite 217 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the
corresponding VW specifications and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.
Checking the engine oil level
The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil.
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached then stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. W
insert it again, pushin
Then pull it out once m
up with engine oil if ne
Oil level in area
- Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
- Oil can be topped up. The in
Oil level in area
- Oil must be topped up. The i
Depending on how you drive
consumption can be up to 0.
higher for the first 5000 km.
checked at regular intervals,
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 212.
Caution If the oil level is above the ar
in damage to the engine and
Service Centre.
Fig. 163 Engine oil dipstick.
AA
AB
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels218
ge 215.
sure that no oil comes into contact with hot pping up.
a do not start the engine. This could result
catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
vironment ove area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
er and escape into the atmosphere via the
hanged at the intervals given in the
the engine oil changed by an Authorised
own in the Maintenance Programme.
if you have the specialist knowledge required!
AA
AA
altea ingles.book Seite 218 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with small quantities of oil.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 212.
Unscrew cap from oil filler opening fig. 164.
Top-up oil in small amounts, using the correct oil.
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 276.
Engine oil specification pa
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! En engine components when to
Caution If the oil level is above the are
in damage to the engine and
shop.
For the sake of the en The oil level must never be ab
through the crankcase breath
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be c
service schedule.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are sh
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself
Fig. 164 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
AB
Checking and refilling levels 219
Safety Fir Technical Data
water and at least 40% coolant addi-
illed with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F
re gives the necessary frost protection down to
arts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
ses the boiling point of the coolant.
must always be at least 40% - even if frost
equired in very cold climates, the proportion of
can be increased. However, the percentage of
exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
ce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
t protection to approx. -40C.
oxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the al container which should be stored out of the
applies to coolant which you have drained off.
2+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that ly cold ambient temperatures, the coolant hicle to breakdown. As the heater would also ere is a risk of suffering exposure!
altea ingles.book Seite 219 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings page 212, Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment.
Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
Wear eye protection to avoid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- zontal to help prevent oil from running down your arm.
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children until it is disposed of.
Caution No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine
damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be
covered by the factory warranty.
For the sake of the environment Because of the disposal problems, the necessary special tools and
specialist knowledge required, we recommend that you have the engine oil
and filter changed by an Authorised Service Centre.
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of
tive.
The cooling system must be f
our coolant additive G 12+ or
(it is dyed purple). This mixtu
-25C and protects the alloy p
also prevents scaling and rai
The concentration of coolant
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is r
the antifreeze additive G 12+
coolant additives should not
protection. It would also redu
coolant additive will give fros
WARNING
The coolant additive is t coolant additive in the origin reach of children. The same
The coolant additive G 1 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extreme could freeze, causing the ve not work in this situation, th
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels220
nsion tank
nd allow it to cool.
ver the cap on the expansion tank with a
y unscrew the cap .
lant expansion tank and read off the
th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.
AX mark.
sion tank
tightly.
ansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
page 276.
ets the required specifications page 219.
additive if coolant additive G 12+, is not avail-
er and bring the coolant concentration back up
possible by putting in the specified additive
nt.
rk. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
n the engine is hot.
altea ingles.book Seite 220 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Caution Other additives may give considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
resulting corrosion in the cooling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
causing serious damage to the engine.
The coolant additive G 12+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G 12
(red) or G 11. Never mix G12 (red colour) with G 11.
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 212.
Opening the coolant expa
Switch off the engine a
To prevent scalding, co
thick cloth and carefull
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coo
coolant level.
If the level is undernea
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant.
Do not fill above the M
Closing the coolant expan
Screw the cap on again
The position of the coolant exp
engine compartment diagram
Make sure that the coolant me
Do not use a different type of
able. In this case use only wat
to the correct level as soon as
page 219.
Always top up with new coola
Do not fill above the MAX ma
out of the cooling system whe
Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety Fir Technical Data
windscreen wiper blades
d
the windscreen should always be
.
he headlight washing system are supplied with
sher fluid container in the engine compartment.
e right-hand side of the engine compartment.
lean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
product to the windscreen washer fluid.
g products exist on the market with high deter-
es, these may be added all-year-round. Please
s on the packaging.
Fig. 166 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
altea ingles.book Seite 221 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The coolant additive G 12+ (dyed purple) may be mixed with G 12 (dyed red)
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 212.
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G 12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and
Topping up washer flui
The water for cleaning
mixed with washer fluid
The windscreen washer and t
fluid from the windscreen wa
The reservoir is located on th
Plain water is not enough to c
mend that you always add a
Approved windscreen cleanin
gent and anti-freeze properti
follow the dilution instruction
Checking and refilling levels222
iper blades
blades are in perfect condition, you
roved visibility. Damaged wiper
ed immediately.
Fig. 167 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion
Fig. 168 Changing the front wiper blades
altea ingles.book Seite 222 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 212.
Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen w
If the windscreen wiper
will benefit from an imp
blades should be replac
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety Fir Technical Data
per blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
reen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
d damage the windscreen wiper blades.
n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
n wipers forward unless they are in the service
et could be damaged.
oved to the service position only when the
altea ingles.book Seite 223 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Service position (for changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have
elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent
wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service
position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of
the arrow page 222, fig. 168.
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wi
The wiper blades should
Caution Damaged or dirty windsc
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the windows. This coul
Never move the windscree
could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscree
position. Otherwise the bonn
Note The wiper arms can be m
bonnet is properly closed.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels224
a qualified workshop.
good visibility through all windows!
er blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
wiper could scratch the rear window.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
n wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
altea ingles.book Seite 224 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away from the glass fig. 169.
Unclip the wiper blade and pull fig. 169.
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm.
With the other hand, press the wiper blade into the retainer.
Check the condition of the wiper blade regularly. Change as required.
If the windscreen wiper scrapes, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
Clean the windscreen wip
The wiper blades should
Caution A damaged or dirty window
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the window.
Never move the windscree
Fig. 169 Changing the rear window wiper blade
A1 A2
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety Fir Technical Data
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
eak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
e brake fluid level is too low page 72.
o check the brake fluid level, read and observe
id
am indicates the brake fluid change
e the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
lease read and follow the warnings in
ng in the engine compartment on page 212 in
artment.
. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
ontent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
so considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
ct.
nly brake fluid compliant with the US standard
mend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
e fluid impairs the braking effect.
altea ingles.book Seite 225 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 276. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes dow
MIN mark, there may be a l
ment panel will warn you if th
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet t the warnings page 212.
Changing the brake flu
The Maintenance Progr
intervals.
We recommend that you hav
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, p
Safety instructions on worki
Working in the engine comp
Brake fluid absorbs moisture
the ambient air. If the water c
system could corrode. This al
brake fluid. Heavy use of the
could impair the braking effe
It is important that you use o
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recom
WARNING
Brake fluid is toxic. Old brak
Fig. 170 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels226
he battery
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the orking on the battery and the electrical
ect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and batteries. This could spill acid through the eyes immediately for several minutes with
al care immediately. Neutralize any acid ing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with llowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
rotection
d is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
and eye protection!
ks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
plosive mixture of gases is released when the
nder charge.
ren away from acid and batteries!
altea ingles.book Seite 226 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 212.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling t
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when w system:
Wear eye protection. Prot particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt the vents. Rinse battery acid from clear water. Then seek medic splashes on the skin or cloth plenty of water. If acid is swa ately.
Fires, sparks, naked light cables and electrical equipm
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye p
Battery aci
tive gloves
Fires, spar
A highly ex
battery is u
Keep child
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
eezes it will be damaged.
te level
ould be checked regularly in high-
t countries and in older batteries.
pen the battery cover at the front in
working in the engine compartment on
arnings on handling the battery on
ay in the "magic eye" on the top of the
in the window, tap the window gently until
shown in the corresponding engine compart-
ye) on the top of the battery changes colour,
el and electrolyte level of the battery.
colourless or bright yellow, the electrolyte level
e the battery checked by a qualified workshop.
are used by the workshops for diagnostic
altea ingles.book Seite 227 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0C.
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left stand
the battery from frost. If it fr
Checking the electroly
The electrolyte level sh
mileage vehicles, in ho
Open the bonnet and o
Safety instructions on
page 212 in W
page 226.
Check the colour displ
battery.
If there are air bubbles
they disperse.
The position of the battery is
ment diagram page 276.
The round window (magic e
depending on the charge lev
If the colour in the window is
of the battery is too low. Hav
The colours green and black
purposes.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels228
vironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
tely and must not be disposed of with ordinary
altea ingles.book Seite 228 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 226.
For the sake of the en Batteries contain toxic substa
must be disposed of appropria
household waste.
Wheels and tyres 229
Safety Fir Technical Data
ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual
one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
be checked immediately by an Authorised
attern
indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
erve the direction of rotation indicated when
tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
wear.
aximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.
d tyres. This may cause an accident.
ration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.
re can be seen on the sticker on the
inflation pressure from the sticker. The
r tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
altea ingles.book Seite 229 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in page 186.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is o
vibrations or the car pulling to
is damaged. The tyres should
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread p
An arrow on the tyre sidewall
directional tread. Always obs
fitting the wheel. This guaran
planing, excessive noise and
WARNING
New tyres do not have m larly carefully to avoid risk o
Never drive with damage
If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressu
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre
values refer to Summe
bar to the values given
Wheels and tyres230
g
oring system constantly checks the
the event of a loss of pressure by means of
instrument cluster display. The system uses
epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
ch 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
eing driven and the tyre pressure will rise
ou should only adjust the tyre pressures when
ly at ambient temperature).
e monitoring system works reliably, you should
t the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
ference values) in the system.
el is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
e when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
vironment creased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
altea ingles.book Seite 230 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitorin
The tyre pressure monit
pressure of the tyres.
The system warns the driver in
symbols and messages in the
ESP page 181.
Note that tyre pressure also d
increases about 0.1 bar for ea
heats up while the vehicle is b
accordingly. For this reason, y
they are cold (i.e. approximate
To ensure that the tyre pressur
check and, if necessary, adjus
store the correct pressures (re
A tyre pressure information lab
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressur even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating of bead may be released or the
For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres lead to in
Wheels and tyres 231
Safety Fir Technical Data
icle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
e tread. Depending on the make, there will be
aced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre side-
TWI or other symbols) indicate the positions of
e minimum tread depth required by law is
ad grooves next to the tread wear indicators).
. Different figures may apply in export countries
premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
ure should be checked at least once per month
ation and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Fig. 172 Changing wheels
altea ingles.book Seite 231 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least
one tyre is insufficient.
- Stop the vehicle.
- Switch the engine off.
- Check the tyre(s).
- Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving
style and fitting.
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your veh
fig. 171, running across th
six to eight of them evenly sp
wall (for instance the letters
the tread wear indicators. Th
1.6 mm (measured in the tre
Worn tyres must be replaced
.
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes
For this reason, the tyre press
page 229.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceler
Fig. 171 Tyre tread wear indicators
Wheels and tyres232
vironment se fuel consumption.
w you to continue driving even with a
ajority of cases.
tted with puncture proof tyres20) indicate
hen there is a loss of tyre pressure.
tyres (emergency gear)
ctronic stabilisation programme)
on page 180.
lly and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
res and sharp turns.
acles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
S intervening often, smoke coming from
f rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
ese occur, stop the vehicle.
tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
F, RSC, SSR or ZP.
re reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
gency driving).
ountry.
altea ingles.book Seite 232 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown page 231, fig. 172. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aquaplaning.
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres- sures.
If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!
For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres will increa
Puncture proof tyres
Anti-puncture tyres allo
punctured tyre, in the m
Vehicles that are factory-fi
on the instrument panel w
Driving with anti-puncture
Leave the ESP/TCS (ele
switched on, or switch
Continue driving carefu
Avoid sudden manoeuv
Avoid driving over obst
Look out for the ESP/TC
the tyres or the smell o
tering noise. If any of th
The anti-puncture tyres have a
DSST, Eufonia, RFT, RO
The sides of this type of tyre a
supported on the sides (emer
20) Depending upon version and c
Wheels and tyres 233
Safety Fir Technical Data
conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and observe legal requirements when doing so.
pid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
cles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
ing driven in emergency conditions, the driving aired and there is a risk of accident.
not deflate on losing pressure because they
ed sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be
tion.
used on front tyres used in emergency
ave to be run-in.
an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
EAT are specially matched to the characteristics
jor contribution to good road holding and safe
ast in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
er). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
altea ingles.book Seite 233 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
At the moment the loss of tyre pressure is indicated on the instrument panel,
at least one of the tyres is driving in emergency mode .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
smoke is coming from one of the tyres,
there is a smell of rubber,
the vehicle vibrates,
there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using anti-puncture tyres?
If the Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP) is out of operation.
If the tyre pressure monitoring system is out of operation.
If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
starts overheating and gives off smoke.
WARNING
When driving in emergency considerably impaired.
The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please
Avoid sharp turns and ra
Avoid driving over obsta
If one or more tyres is be quality of the vehicle is imp
Note The anti-puncture tyres do
are supported on the reinforc
detected with a visual inspec
Snow chains must not be
conditions.
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels h
The tyres and wheel rims are
tyres and rims approved by S
of the vehicle and make a ma
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at le
tyres or both rear tyres togeth
Wheels and tyres234
on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all
se with an unknown history of use.
ed, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.
itted with radial tyres of the same type, size e same tread pattern.
vironment according to the laws in the country concerned.
not generally possible to use the wheels from
pply to wheels of the same model. The use of
t been approved by SEAT for use with your
icle's type approval for use on public roads.
same as the tyres that are mounted on the
er tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
e with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
htened to the correct torque.
atched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
altea ingles.book Seite 234 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
DOT ... 1103 ... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre has full information on the technical require-
ments when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
WARNING
We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicle you have no alternative, you times.
Never use old tyres or tho
If wheel trims are retrofitt brakes is not restricted. This
All four wheels must be f (rolling circumference) and th
For the sake of the en Old tyres must be disposed of
Note For technical reasons, it is
other vehicles. This can also a
wheels or tyres which have no
model may invalidate the veh
If the spare tyre is not the
vehicle - for example with wint
a short period of time and driv
as soon as possible.
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tig
The design of wheel bolts is m
fitted, the correct wheel bolts
WARNING (continued)
Wheels and tyres 235
Safety Fir Technical Data
to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
ee sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
ter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
pply to winter tyres.
veness when the tread is worn down to a depth
e 233, New tyres and wheels determines the
hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
e sticker in the driver's field of view. These
ur Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
e followed.
d for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
hen the roads are free of snow and ice.
refer to the notes on the spare wheel
wheels.
winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, ge and thus, an accident risk.
altea ingles.book Seite 235 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model page 207.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and
ice.
In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicles
handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.
Winter tyres must be inflated
specified for summer tyres (s
Winter tyres must be fitted on
Information on permitted win tration documents. Use only
vehicle documentation also a
Winter tyres lose their effecti
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code pag
following speed limits:
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles w
tyre must have an appropriat
stickers are available from yo
ments of each country must b
Do not have winter tyres fitte
summer tyres handle better w
If you have a flat tyre, please
page 233, New tyres and
WARNING
The maximum speed for the this could lead to tyre dama
Wheels and tyres236
altea ingles.book Seite 236 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre
sizes page 274.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more that 9
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer.
Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Note In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
legal requirements of the country should be followed.
We recommend that you ask your Approved Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
If and when 237
Safety Fir Technical Data
factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles
.
, level ground.
hen the vehicle is on the jack, risk of accident.
t underneath the vehicle, this must be secured se, there is a risk of injury.
altea ingles.book Seite 237 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing eye
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque, risk of accident.
The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads, risk of injury
Use the jack only on firm
Never start the engine w
If work is to be carried ou by suitable stands. Otherwi
WARNING (continued)
If and when238
ains must not be used on the compact tempo-
on one of the front wheels when using snow
rary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
hains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
tured front wheel.
e checked and corrected as soon as possible. e wheel is 4.2 bar. Failure to do so could result
0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
, hard braking and fast cornering, risk of acci-
mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
mal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on wheel rim.
hicles not including a spare wheel) is
anel in the luggage compartment.
the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.
container with sealing compound to repair the
generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
.
altea ingles.book Seite 238 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Compact temporary spare wheel*
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow ch
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture
chains, fit the compact tempo
You can then attach the snow c
this wheel to replace the punc
WARNING
The tyre pressures must b The tyre pressure for the spar in an accident.
Do not drive faster than 8
Avoid heavy acceleration dent.
Never use two or more co accident.
No other type of tyre (nor the compact temporary spare
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for ve
stored under the floor p
Your vehicle is equipped with
The tyre repair kit consists of a
puncture and a compressor to
reliably seal punctures up to a
of a foreign body into the tyre
Fig. 173 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel
If and when 239
Safety Fir Technical Data
s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.
on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
ing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
.
ents when doing so.
cribed below
er. Also refer to page 240, fig. 174.
ts.
jack in the corresponding zone.
then put on the spare wheel.
s firmly in diagonal sequence with the box
altea ingles.book Seite 239 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a
Caution If you have to change the tyre
wheel being changed by plac
the vehicle from rolling away
Note Please observe legal requirem
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as des
Remove the wheel cov
Slacken the wheel bol
Raise the car with the
Take off the wheel and
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolt
spanner.
Replace the hub cap.
If and when240
removed to gain access to the wheel
ok from the tools into the designated
he bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
Fig. 174 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap
altea ingles.book Seite 240 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque is 120 Nm.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
In the interest of safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt
torque has been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be
bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction ho ring, located in one of t
fig. 174.
Pull off the hub cap.
If and when 241
Safety Fir Technical Data
olts
e loosened before raising the vehicle.
far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
by the end turn it about one full turn to the
far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
close to the end and turn the bolt to the
.
to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 175 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts
altea ingles.book Seite 241 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel b
The wheel bolts must b
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as
Grasp the box spanner
left fig. 175.
Tighten
Fit the box spanner as
Grasp the box spanner
right until it is secured
An adapter is required
bolts.
If and when242
altea ingles.book Seite 242 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
If and when 243
Safety Fir Technical Data
nt under the door sill closest to the wheel
176.
r the jacking point until the arm of the jack
rtical rib under the door sill.
e arm of the jack fits around the rib under
ovable base plate of the jack is flat on the
the defective wheel is just clear of the
r of the door sills mark the jacking points
en made for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
e jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
tted on solid ground offering good support. Use
cessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.
at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to dent.
ged if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.
altea ingles.book Seite 243 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Raising the vehicle
The vehicle must be raised with a jack to remove the wheel.
Locate the jacking poi
being changed fig.
Wind up the jack unde
is directly below the ve
Align the jack so that th
the door sill and the m
ground fig. 177.
Raise the vehicle until
ground.
Recesses at the front and rea
fig. 176. A position has be
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under th
Therefore, the jack must be fi
a large and stable base, if ne
tiles) use a rubber mat or sim
WARNING
Take all precautions so th do so could result in an acci
The vehicle can be dama jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly
Fig. 176 The jacking points
Fig. 177 Fitting the jack
If and when244
an and turn easily. Before fitting the spare
f the wheel and hub mounting surfaces. These
fitting the wheel.
crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
se. The reversible screwdriver blade should be
d for this purpose.
n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
uired to turn the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 179 Anti-theft wheel bolt
altea ingles.book Seite 244 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
Change the wheel as described below after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
fig. 178.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be cle
wheel, inspect the condition o
surfaces must be clean before
The hexagonal socket in the s
wheel bolts when they are loo
removed when the tool is use
If tyres with a specific directio
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal soc
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is req
bolts.
Fig. 178 Changing the wheel: hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts after they have been loosened
If and when 245
Safety Fir Technical Data
yre Mobility System)
d safety notes
a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
, sealing compound and an air compressor are
artment under the floor panel.
reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
about 4 mm in diameter.
the foreign body from the tyre.
mpound are located on the sealing compound
e air compressor are included in an additional
a puncture with the sealing compound if the riving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
s and follow instructions concerning pound carefully.
80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard
epaired with sealing compound are only suit- short period. Therefore, please drive carefully
ed workshop.
nvironment ainers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
altea ingles.book Seite 245 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go page 244, fig. 179.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Error code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the
adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit* (T
General information an
Your vehicle is equipped with
In the event of a tyre puncture
located in the luggage comp
The Tyre Mobility System will
tion of a foreign body of up to
It is not necessary to remove
Instructions for the sealing co
container.
Notes for the proper use of th
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair tyre has been damaged by d
Always observe warning compressor and sealing com
Do not drive faster than braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been r able for temporary use over a to the next available qualifi
For the sake of the e Used sealing compound cont
If and when246
ents when doing so.
escribe the procedures for repairing
nd
container give detailed information on
compound.
ssor and hose from the container.
onto the valve.
ble into a 12 volt socket.
monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
r hose from the valve.
from the socket.
proper storing location.
altea ingles.book Seite 246 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible
with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
General information and safety notes.
Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights on and place the warning triangle in position. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.
Caution Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a gradient.
Note Please observe legal requirem
Tyre repair
The following sections d
a tyre.
Using the sealing compou
The instructions on the
how to use the sealing
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compre
Screw the retaining nut
Plug the compressor ca
Turn on compressor and
sure gauge.
Completing the repair
Remove the compresso
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor
Return all tools to their
If and when 247
Safety Fir Technical Data
e steering wheel
and the component concerned.
e failed component page 249.
m inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
e fuse out.
e (which will have a melted metal strip)
same ampere rating.
partment
and the component concerned.
r in the engine compartment by pressing
entre of the cover fig. 181.
e failed component page 249.
Fig. 181 Fuse box cover in engine compartment
altea ingles.book Seite 247 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Note The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6 minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
If a fuse has blown it must be replaced
Fuse cover underneath th
Switch off the ignition
Identify the fuse for th
Take the plastic clip fro
blown fuse and pull th
Replace the blown fus
with a new fuse of the
Fuse cover in engine com
Switch off the ignition
Prise off the fuse cove
the tabs towards the c
Identify the fuse for th
Fig. 180 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
If and when248
s and never replace them with fuses with a ly could result in fire. This could also cause
electrical system.
ows again after a short time, the electrical
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
stronger fuse, you could cause damage to
cal system.
uses in the vehicle. These are available from
100
150
200
Amperes
altea ingles.book Seite 248 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Colour coding of fuses
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuse higher rating. Failure to comp damage to other parts of the
Note If a newly replaced fuse bl
system must be checked by a
If you replace a fuse with a
another location in the electri
Always keep some spare f
SEAT dealers.
Colour Amperes
light brown 5
red 10
Blue 15
yellow 20
natural (white) 25
green 30
orange 40
red 50
white 80
Blue
grey
violet
Colour
If and when 249
Safety Fir Technical Data
Amperes
5
10
10
avigator 5
rument panel 10
tchboard 10
10
10
10
altea ingles.book Seite 249 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag
10 RSE input (roof screen)
11 Vacant
11 Vacant
12 Left xenon headlight
13 Heating controls / ESP, ASR switch / Reverse / Preinstallation of telephone / Tomtom N
14 ABS/ESP switchboard / Engine / Headlights / Trailer switchboard / Light switch / Inst
15 Headlight regulation switchboard / Heated wipers / Instrument lights / Diagnosis Swi
16 Right xenon headlight
17 Engine management
18 Vacant
19 Vacant
20 Park Pilot (Parking assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP switchboard
If and when250
7,5
5
10
20
20
10
20
20
40
10
10
10
15
20
20
40
25
Amperes
altea ingles.book Seite 250 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
21 Cable control unit
22 Volumetric alarm sensor/ Alarm horn
23 Diagnosis / Rain sensor / Light switch
24 Vacant
25 Switchboard coupling automatic gearbox
26 Vacuum pump
27 RSE input (roof screen)
28 Rear wiper motor / Switchboard wiring
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter / socket
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 Engine management
37 Engine management
38 Engine management
39 Trailer control unit (coupling)
40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left side)
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and right side)
42 Vacant
43 Trailer pre-installation
44 Rear window heater
Number Consumer
If and when 251
Safety Fir Technical Data
30
30
15
20
40
30
20
20
20
5
20
15
30
Amperes
altea ingles.book Seite 251 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations. If discrepancies should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
inside of the fuse cover for the correct information for your model.
45 Electric windows (front)
46 Rear electric windows
47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay)
48 Convenience controls
49 Heating controls
50 Heated seats
51 Sunroof
52 Headlight washer system
53 Vacant
54 Taxi (taximeter power supply)
55 Vacant
56 Taxi (taximeter power supply)
57 Vacant
58 Central locking control unit
Number Consumer
If and when252
Amperes
30
5
5
30
15
5
15
5
5
10
5
25
30
20
5
10
30
15
altea ingles.book Seite 252 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Fuses layout, engine compartment, left part
Fuses
Number Consumer
1 Windscreen wipers
2 Steering column
3 Cable control unit
4 ABS
5 AQ gearbox
6 instrument panel
7 Vacant
8 Radio
9 Telephone/TomTom Navigator
10 Engine management
Engine management
11 Vacant
12 Electronic control unit
13 Petrol injection module supply
Diesel injection module supply
14 Coil
15 Engine management
Pump relay
16 ABS pump
17 Horn
18 Vacant
If and when 253
Safety Fir Technical Data
30
15
5
5
10
15
10
40
40
40
50
40
50
30
40
Amperes
altea ingles.book Seite 253 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
19 Clean
20 Vacant
21 Lambda probe
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor
23
Engine management
Engine management
Engine management
24 AKF, gearbox valve
25 Right lighting
26 Left lighting
27 Engine management
Engine management
28 Ignition key
29 Electric windows (front and back)
Electric windows (front)
30 Ignition key
Number Consumer
If and when254
by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
s part or on the base.
eep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
t affect road safety should have spares in the
Amperes
150
200
80
100
80/50
80
40
altea ingles.book Seite 254 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Position in engine compartment: Side box
Fuses
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above list, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
to alterations.
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, first turn off the equipment concerned.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Fingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
reduction in the bulb life and condensation on the mirror surface, thus
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced
on the bulb, either on the glas
It is highly recommended to k
very least, the bulbs that mos
vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Turn signals - PY21W
Number Consumer
B1 Alternator < 140 W
Alternator > 140 W
C1 Power steering servo
D1 Multi-terminal voltage supply 30. Internal fuse box
E1 Ventilator > 500 W / Ventilator < 500
F1 PTCs (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
G1 PTC (Supplementary electrical heating using air)
H1 Central locking control unit
If and when 255
Safety Fir Technical Data
essing the lamps, any replacement work should
wever, the following is a description of how to
the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Fig. 182 Main headlight lamps
altea ingles.book Seite 255 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Xenon headlights21)/ self-adjusting*
Dipped and full beam - D1S22)
Flashes and extra full beam - H1
Position W5W
Turn signals PY21W
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Upper rear light
Stop/Position - P21W23)
Turn signals - R10W
Lower rear light
Fog light - P21W
Reverse light - P21W
Side indicator
Side indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Note Due to the difficulty in acc
be done by a SEAT dealer. Ho
change the lamps except for
Main headlight lamps
Turn signals
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights21) On this type of headlight, the bulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
that complex elements must be removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
on the automatic control system incorporated. 22) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5 times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
times more than that of halogen bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
stances, there is no need to change the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle. 23) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
AA
AB
AC
AD
If and when256
Fig. 184 Dipped head- lights
Fig. 185 Dipped head- lights
altea ingles.book Seite 256 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Turn signal lamps
Raise the bonnet.
Rotate the lamp holder fig. 183 to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam lights
Raise the bonnet
Fig. 183 Turn signal lamps
AA
If and when 257
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 186 by pulling on this.
fig. 187 from the bulb.
. 187 inwards and to the right.
t the replacement so that it sits correctly
reflector.
the reverse order.
Fig. 187 Main beam headlights
AC
A1
A2
altea ingles.book Seite 257 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Remove the loops page 256, fig. 184 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
Remove the connector page 256, fig. 185 from the bulb.
Disengage the retainer spring page 256, fig. 185 pressing
inwards and to the right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam lights
Raise the bonnet
Remove the cover fi
Remove the connector
Press the spring fig
Extract the bulb and fi
into the cut-out on the
Installation is done in
A1
A2
A3
Fig. 186 Main beam headlights
If and when258
fig. 189 outwards.
lling this out and inserting the replace-
he reverse order.
A1
altea ingles.book Seite 258 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 188 by pulling on this.
Extract the lamp holder
Replace the bulb by pu
ment.
Installation is done in t
Rear lights
Side lights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Reversing lights
Rear fog light
Fig. 188 Side lights
Fig. 189 Side lights
AD
If and when 259
Safety Fir Technical Data
e luggage compartment lateral panel.
ting fig. 191 securing the rear light.
r under the plastic fitting may help to
ar light from its casing taking care not to
er connector.
age 260, fig. 192 from the lamp holder
rotate to the left then fit the replacement.
in reverse order, taking special care when
. The metal contacts of the lamp holder
tly fitted with respect to the rear light
AB
AC
altea ingles.book Seite 259 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Side lights and brake lights
Open the tailgate
Remove the bolts fig. 190 .
Remove the cover of th
Unscrew the plastic fit
Inserting a screwdrive
loosen it.
Partially remove the re
pull on the cable.
Remove the lamp hold
Unscrew the bolts p
and pull on this.
Press on the lamp and
To refit follow the steps
fitting the lamp holder
ends should be correc
contacts.
Fig. 190 Side lights and brake lights
Fig. 191 Side lights and brake lights
AA
If and when260
g. 192 from the lamp holder and pull
r from the turn signal using a screw driver
rrow (see fig. 193).
p by pressing it down and rotating to the
he reverse order.
light
to the left, and remove it in the direction
.
ssing on it and rotating at the same time
AC
Fig. 194 Lamp on interior side of bumper
altea ingles.book Seite 260 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Turn indicators
Remove the diode from its housing page 259.
Unscrew the bolts fi
on this.
Pull out the lamp holde
in the direction of the a
Fit the replacement lam
left.
Installation is done in t
Reverse light / rear fog
Rotate the lamp holder
of the arrow fig. 194
Replace the bulb by pre
to the left
Fig. 192 Indicator lights
Fig. 193 Indicator lights.
If and when 261
Safety Fir Technical Data
lights
d fitting by pressing on the inside edge of
lat side of a screwdriver fig. 196.
Fig. 196 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 197 Luggage compartment light
altea ingles.book Seite 261 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Side indicators
Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.
Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs fig. 195, arrow .
Insert the lamp as shown by the arrow fig. 195.
Luggage compartment
Extract the tulip shape
this -arrow- using the f
Fig. 195 Side indicator
A1
A2
If and when262
d fitting, carefully using the flat side of
er inserted in the crack as shown by the
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
Fig. 199 Registration plate light
altea ingles.book Seite 262 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Press the lamp sideways and remove it from its housing
page 261, fig. 197.
Registration light
Remove the tulip-shape
the screwdriver as a lev
arrow fig. 198.
Remove the lamp, mov
outwards fig. 199.
Fig. 198 Registration plate light
If and when 263
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
ve a sufficient wire cross section.
ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be
nother vehicle to start the engine.
the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
ss section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol
for diesel engines.
ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
s are connected.
ust be properly connected to the vehicles elec-
altea ingles.book Seite 263 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Sunroof light
Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure fig. 201.
Remove the lamp, mov
outwards fig. 201.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must ha
If the engine fails to start bec
connected to the battery of a
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
documentation). The wire cro
engines and at least 35 mm2
Note The vehicles must not tou
soon as the positive terminal
The discharged battery m
trical system.
Fig. 200 Removing sunroof light
Fig. 201 Removing sunroof light
If and when264
f the black jump lead to a solid metal
lted on to the engine block, or onto the
e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
ar the battery .
ch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
car with the flat battery and wait one or
ngine is running.
jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
er and rear window heater in the vehicle
s helps minimise voltage peaks which are
ds are disconnected.
ning, disconnect the leads in reverse
n above.
they have good metal-to-metal contact with
tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
nute.
AX
altea ingles.book Seite 264 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
How to jump start: description
In fig. 202, the flat battery is and the charged battery .
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 202
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end o
component which is bo
engine block itself of th
connect it to a point ne
5. Position the leads in su
contact with any movin
Starting
6. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the
two minutes until the e
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blow
with the flat battery. Thi
generated when the lea
10. When the engine is run
order to the details give
Connect the battery clamps so
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, swi
try again after about half a mi
Fig. 202 How to connect the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A-
If and when 265
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 265 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 212, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when266
ng points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
te gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
ou are towing. Brake earlier than you
h a more gentle pressure on the brake.
towed vehicle
e remains taut at all times when towing.
ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-bar.
elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
altea ingles.book Seite 266 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 263.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch on the ignition.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the followi
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first unt
gradually.
Begin and change gear
matic vehicle, accelera
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle y
would normally, but wit
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-rop
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a v
tow-rope if you do not have a
A tow-rope should be slightly
It is advisable to use a tow-rop
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experie
drivers should be familiar with
enced drivers should not attem
If and when 267
Safety Fir Technical Data
ways be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
starting.
Fig. 203 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 204 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
altea ingles.book Seite 267 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
The towing eye should al
notes on page 266, Tow-
Trailer eyes
If and when268
e
m the onboard tools.
. 205.
in the direction of the arrow.
it to the left, in the direction of the arrow
ts when towing or tow-starting.
ing lights of both vehicles. However, observe
y.
icles with an automatic gearbox must not be
Fig. 206 Attachment for towing eye
altea ingles.book Seite 268 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring from the onboard tools.
Pull the lower front cover down and leave the cover hanging on
the vehicle.
Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the
lower slot and lever gently.
Screw the towing eye as shown by arrow anti-clockwise to the
limit position in the front page 267, fig. 203 or rear
page 267, fig. 204 threaded hole.
Front towing eye for trailer (FR version) Fitting the front towing ey
Take the towing ring fro
Remove screw fig
Press the release lever
Screw the eye to its lim
fig. 206.
Tighten the eye.
Note Observe legal requiremen
Switch on the hazard warn
any regulations to the contrar
For technical reasons, veh
tow-started.
Fig. 205 Access to towing eye housing
AA
If and when 269
Safety Fir Technical Data
om the onboard tools.
sing the upper part in the direction of the
it to the left, in the direction of the arrow
ts when towing or tow-starting.
ning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
ry.
icles with an automatic gearbox must not be
Fig. 208 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
altea ingles.book Seite 269 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on page 266, Tow-starting.
Rear towing eye for trailer (FR version)
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring fr
Release the cover pres
arrow fig. 207.
Screw the eye to its lim
fig. 208.
Tighten the eye.
Note Observe legal requiremen
Switch on the hazard war
any regulations to the contra
For technical reasons, veh
tow-started.
Fig. 207 Cover for towing eye at rear
If and when270
altea ingles.book Seite 270 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
notes on page 266, Tow-starting.
General notes on the technical data 271
Safety Fir Technical Data
if additional equipment is fitted, for different
nd for other countries.
altea ingles.book Seite 271 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
What you should be aware of
General notes
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data.
All data in these documents are valid for the basic model as offered in Spain.
The vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle
registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different
models, for special vehicles a
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbreviation Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 kilometres
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per kilometre.
CO2 Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane number, indication of the ignition quality of the diesel.
RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.
General notes on the technical data272
he inside of the spare wheel recess in the
be found in the vehicle information: fig. 209
n the Maintenance Program.
er
ber (chassis number)
ne power output
letters
im code
s
n the Maintenance Program.
n 2 km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) mixed
altea ingles.book Seite 272 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on t
luggage compartment.
The following information can
This information also figures i
Production control numb
Vehicle identification num
Model code number
Model designation / engi
Engine and gearbox code
Paint number / interior tr
Optional equipment code
Consumption values
CO emissions 2
The data of 2 to 9 also figure i
CO emissions and consumptio
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Fig. 209 Vehicle data sticker luggage compartment
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
General notes on the technical data 273
Safety Fir Technical Data
vehicle to another.
on figures are calculated in accordance with the
00/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
ormal everyday driving.
are applied:
in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The
r the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban
xide emissions. The gas composition is then
altea ingles.book Seite 273 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
How are the figures measured?
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the weight
category of the car, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emissi
EC test requirements 1999/1
istic test method based on n
The following test conditions
Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on
personal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the condi-
tion of the vehicle.
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.
Extra urban cycle In the extra urban cycle the vehicle undergoes frequent acceleration and braking
road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Combined The average overall consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37% fo
cycle.
CO2 emissions The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dio
analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions.
General notes on the technical data274
t exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
t exceed 75 kg.
e recommend that you always tow
awbar load. The response of the trailer on the
r load is too small.
rawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
.
ould not drive at speeds above 80 km/h when plies to countries where higher speeds are
m trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible total weight is exceeded, the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
ins, wheel bolts
ure values can be found on the inside of the
lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
s must not be reduced .
altea ingles.book Seite 274 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
weight of the driver.
For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of
accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .
WARNING
Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- dent. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and requirements.
Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weigh
of the towing bracket must no
In the interest of road safety, w
approaching the maximum dr
road will be poor if the drawba
If the maximum permissible d
empty and light-weight single
base of less than 1 metre), at
stipulation for a drawbar load
WARNING
For safety reasons, you sh towing a trailer. This also ap permitted.
Never exceed the maximu the permissible axle load or driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow cha
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre press
tank flap. The tyre pressure va
raised pressures of warm tyre
General notes on the technical data 275
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 275 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.
Consult the chapter wheels of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Correct tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads could be damaged.
Note We recommend that you ask your Authorised Service Centre for information
about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Technical data276
ions and restrictions on the technical data are
altea ingles.book Seite 276 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Technical data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, to do
so may cause serious damage to the engine.
Radiator expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and replenishment of the service fluids are carried out on the
components mentioned above. These operations are described in the
page 212.
Overview
Further explanations, instruct
contained as of page 271.
Fig. 210 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical data 277
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 277 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (86 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (86)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression ratio 10,5 0,3
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 169
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 9,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 14,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1886
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1366
Gross axle weight, front in kg 940
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 984
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 680
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Technical data278
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 278 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1750-4000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Compression ratio 9,7 -0,4
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 194
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1959
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1439
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1008
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 987
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical data 279
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 279 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.6l 75 kW (102 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 710
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 75 (102)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 148/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595
Compression ratio 10,5 0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 181
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,6
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,8
Technical data280
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 280 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 bhp)
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1920
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1395
Gross axle weight, front in kg 967
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 690
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 118 (160)/5000-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-4200
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1798
Compression ratio 9,8 -0,5
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) Slight power loss
Technical data 281
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 281 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,4
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2030
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1510
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1062
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 994
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Technical data282
RON or premium unleaded 95 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 282 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression ratio 11,5 - 0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98
a) Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 206
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,5
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1970
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1450
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1015
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 720
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical data 283
Safety Fir Technical Data
RON or premium unleaded 95 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 283 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 110 kW (150 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 110 (150)/ 6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 3500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression ratio 11,5 - 0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98
a) Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 203
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,1
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2010
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1490
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1050
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 985
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical data284
RON or premium unleaded 95 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 284 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Manual
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 740
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression ratio 10,3 - 0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98
a) Slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,7
Technical data 285
Safety Fir Technical Data
RON or premium unleaded 95 RONa)
altea ingles.book Seite 285 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 2.0 litre 147 kW (200 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1960
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1484
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1084
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 973
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 740
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 147 (200)/ 5100-6000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280/ 1800-5000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1984
Compression ratio 10,3 - 0,5
Fuel Super Plus unleaded 98
a) With a slight power loss
Technical data286
altea ingles.book Seite 286 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 220
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,7
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2079
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1559
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1114
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 998
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Technical data 287
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 287 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Diesel engine 1.9l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Compression ratio 19 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2005
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1480
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1045
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 983
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 740
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical data288
altea ingles.book Seite 288 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 TDI 77 kW (105 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 77 (105)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Compression ratio 19 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 8,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 12,5
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2035
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1510
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1074
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 982
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical data 289
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 289 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 100 kW (136 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 199
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10
Technical data290
altea ingles.book Seite 290 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 100 kW (136 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1070
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 975
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 100 (136)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Technical data 291
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 291 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Maximum speed in km/h 199
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,9
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2060
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1540
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1105
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical data292
altea ingles.book Seite 292 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Diesel engine 2.0l TDI 103 kW (140 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,9
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1070
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 975
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical data 293
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 293 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 TDI 103 kW (140 bhp). Automatic
General engine data
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane-Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel.
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2060
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1540
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1105
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical data294
altea ingles.book Seite 294 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
General engine data
Performance figures
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Compression ratio 18,5 0,5
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 211
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6
Technical data 295
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea ingles.book Seite 295 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
st Operating instructions Tips and Maintenance
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2041
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1521
Gross axle weight, front in kg 1092
Gross axle weight, rear in kg 982
Permitted roof load in kg 75
With no brakes, gradients up to 12% 750
With brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical data296
Rear
1,509 mm
1,517 mm
tres
altea ingles.book Seite 296 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,282 mm/ 1,768 mm
Height at kerb weight 1,546 mm
Front and rear projection 916 mm/ 788 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track widtha)
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front
1,525 mm
1,533 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 55 litres, reserve 7 li
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
Index 297
omatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
124
iliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 144
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
tery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ke pad wear indicator*
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 186
ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 184
altea ingles.book Seite 297 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Adjusting simple headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Adjustments for Bixenon headlights
driving on the left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
driving on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Airbags
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Alterations to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Apple iPod connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 125
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 125
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 167
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Aut
Aux
B Ball
BAS
Bat
Belt
Belt
Bio
Bon
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Index298
seats
SOFIX and Toptether systems . . . . . . . . . . . 52
n the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
rette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ning alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 198
ning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ning cloth seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
ning fabric trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ning leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
ning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
ning steel wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
ning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
ning wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
atic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
atronic
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rol
ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rols
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
altea ingles.book Seite 298 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Bulb changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Bulb defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 162
C Car care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Locking system for involuntary unlocking . . 95
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Changing the rear lights
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 261
rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 222
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 227
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child
I
o
Ciga
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clea
Clim
Clim
G
Cloc
Cloth
Cock
Cont
L
Cont
Cont
Cont
E
Index 299
ing with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ing with respect for the environment . . . . 191
licate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
t filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 114
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
tric steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 163
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
tronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 181
tronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 81
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
rgency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ssion control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
altea ingles.book Seite 299 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Convenience closing
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Convenience opening
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 220
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Coolant level
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Coolant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Coolant temperature
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Cruise control*
Turning off the cruise control system . . . . . 177
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44
Display (without warning or information texts) . 59
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 180
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Economically / With Respect for the
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Driving economically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driv
Driv
Dup
Dus
Dyn
E EDL
EDS
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
eme
Eme
Emi
Index300
reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tank
pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
tank
ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
ral overview of the engine compartment 276
e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 172
rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
restraints
djusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 130
djustment of the head restraint angle . . . 130
emoving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . 13
n-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14
light flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
altea ingles.book Seite 300 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Engine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 212
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Engine oil pressure
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 78
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 181
Example of menu use
Open the configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 67
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fuel
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fuel level
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuel
W
Fuel
O
Fuel
S
Fuel:
Fuse
G G 12
Gear
Gene
Glov
Glow
W
H Hand
W
Haza
head
A
a
R
head
I
Head
Head
Index 301
ual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
age display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 208
ifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ti-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 141
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ervations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
ane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
altea ingles.book Seite 301 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Heated window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Indicator lights
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Instrument panel menus
Principal menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Interior front light, type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Interior front light, type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
ISOFIX and Toptether systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
K Key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
L Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Load compartment
See Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 147
See also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 17
Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Main beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Man
MFD
Mile
Mirr
Mob
Mod
Mul
Mul
N Num
O Obs
Oct
Oil
Oil
Oil
One
Index302
rse gear
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
fuel (biodiesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
back function
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
stowage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ing in
rake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
yres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
ing in tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ty equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty instructions
oolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ty notes
elt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
urtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
isabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . 45
ront airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ide airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
sing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
sing seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
altea ingles.book Seite 302 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Trips to foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic key tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Puncture proof tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
R Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear drink holder*
Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rear shelf
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Remote control key
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Repairs
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reve
M
RME
Roll-
S
W
Roof
Roof
Roof
Rubb
Runn
B
E
T
Runn
S Safe
Safe
Safe
Safe
C
Safe
B
C
D
F
S
U
U
Index 303
wage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
wage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 137
visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
roof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
tch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
tches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
k
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
(Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
tening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 275
ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
altea ingles.book Seite 303 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 131, 132
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Self directional headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 275
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 165
Steam cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Steering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering wheel controls
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 160
Storage compartment
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Stowage area
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Sto
Sto
Sun
Sun
Sun
Swi
Swi
Swi
T Tail
Tan
TCS
TCS
The
Tigh
Too
Index304
ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ing reports
ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ing texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ing triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
hing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 200
r
arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 221
r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241, 275
orque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
el trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
els . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 274
assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21
wear seatbelts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
screen washer fluid
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
screen wiper blades
leaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
altea ingles.book Seite 304 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Trailer turn signals
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 117
Turning on the emergency indicators . . . . . . . 115
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . 238, 245
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 245
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 229
U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
USB* connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using the Tiptronic gear system . . . . . . . . . . . 171
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Vehicle paint
Car care products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Vehicle tools
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Vehicle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Volumetric sensor*
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
W Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Warn
Warn
R
Y
Warn
Warn
Was
Was
Was
Was
Wate
w
Wate
Wea
Whe
T
Whe
Whe
Whe
Why
Why
Why
Why
Wind
Wind
W
Wind
C
Index 305
altea ingles.book Seite 305 Dienstag, 11. September 2007 4:39 16
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 212
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the "Copyright" Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.09.07
Interior Manual ALTEA 6/9/07 16:00 Pgina 3
In gl
s 5P
00 12
00 3B
Related manuals for Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Altea Freetrack Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea Freetrack as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea Freetrack. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea Freetrack Edition 07.07 2007 Hatchback Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.